5876 lines
500 KiB
HTML
5876 lines
500 KiB
HTML
<style>body{max-width:1250px;}body,table,td {font-size:14px; font-family: Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;}</style><!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
|
||
<html>
|
||
<head>
|
||
<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8">
|
||
|
||
<!--font table contains 3 fonts total-->
|
||
</head>
|
||
<body><div id='divhlpmain'><sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">Lotus Suspension Analysis </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> SHARK, Introduction<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<u>Lotus</u></font> Suspension provides a simple to use tool for the design and analysis of suspension geometry. Standard suspension types using individual default pre-filled templates provide easy creation of kinematic models in either <u>2D</u> or <u>3D</u> modes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm0.bmp" title="bm0.bmp"><br>
|
||
Creating a new model using pre-defined template types<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Analysis of suspension geometry in Bump, Rebound, Roll and Steering is performed in an interactive environment. <u>Graphical</u> plots of selected derivatives are continually updated as suspension hard points are modified, either singly or as <u>groups</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm1.bmp" title="bm1.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphical Display of Suspension Model<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The inclusion of <u>bushes</u>, spring properties, <u>tyre stiffness</u> and <u>external forces</u> allow <u>compliant</u> response to be calculated, including automatic creation of <font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">compliance coefficients<sup>K</sup></font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> for defined <u>load sets</u></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm2.bmp" title="bm2.bmp"><br>
|
||
Compliant Suspension Coefficients Display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Mass properties and component damping provide modal analysis capability and the prediction of the forced damped response of the system. Individual mode shapes can be viewed animated on the model. The forced response at specific frequencies can be animated together with the complete speed sweep response.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm3.bmp" title="bm3.bmp"><br>
|
||
Modal Analysis Frequencies <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Bar Chart<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Suspension templates can be either corner models or complete axle models. These complete axles may be because they are rigid axle suspension types or because it is required to model the effect of a connecting link such as the rack, sub-frame or an anti-roll bar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm4.bmp" title="bm4.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Full Axle Template <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Anti-Roll Bar<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview - Introduction<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
</font>Shark provides an analysis tool for calculating the suspension <u>derivatives</u> of pre-defined types of kinematic suspensions, through an interactive <u>graphical</u> interface. The program calculates the suspension derivatives, i.e. camber, castor, toe angle, roll centre height, etc., over three articulation types, bump/rebound, roll and steering, (steering 3D module only).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It functions either in <u>2D or 3D forms</u> with increasing level of data requirements and analysis results with the 3D form. All suspension hard points can be <u>edited</u> or <u>dragged</u> through a fully <u>dynamic 3D viewing</u> environment with <u>graphical</u> results updated as the suspension hard points are modified.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Extensions to the integral solver allow for <u>bush compliant</u> effects and <u>applied external forces</u> to be included to understand the impacts of compliance on the suspension characteristics.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Mass and damping properties also allow for the rigid body modes to calculated and the modal shapes viewed. The application of spring forces and external forces allow the forced/damped response to be predicted and the displacements viewed at user defined frequencies.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm5.bmp" title="bm5.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example screen shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Overall appearance of application<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview, Modules<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The program has two modules, <u>2D</u></font> and 3D. The suspension geometry data used in each module is completely independent of the other module. Switching between modules with the relevant menu or icon will change the display to reflect the model, results and settings of that module.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It is possible to move a 2D model data into one of the default 3D templates via the <i>Solve / <u>Convert 2D to 3D</u></i><i></i> menu option. You currently cannot automatically simplify 3D data down to 2D, this not considered a likely requirement.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Many of the commands and menu options are identical between the 2D and 3D modules. Where a menu or action is not relevant to that module it will be <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">greyed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> out.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Again where possible the same functionality and behavior is common between the 2D and 3D modules.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm6.bmp" title="bm6.bmp"><br>
|
||
Module Icons in the File toolbar<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Suspension Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
In the 2D module there are only two basic suspension <u>types</u></font>;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>1) Double Wishbone<br>
|
||
2) Macpherson Strut<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Because in the 2D module no provision is included for the modeling of springs, dampers or steering mechanisms, the majority of the 3D module<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s templates are covered by the two 2D suspension types.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
This does mean that trailing arm type suspensions cannot be modelled in the 2D module.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D module works in the cross car plane only, i.e. Y-Z plane, where Y is cross car and Z is height.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm7.bmp" title="bm7.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the 2D Suspension Type<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Suspension Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D module has 28 pre-defined suspension types;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font><b> 1) <u>Double Wishbone, damper to lower wishbone</u></b><b></b> <br>
|
||
<b> 2) <u>Lower H frame, single upper link</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 3) <u>Steerable Macpherson Strut</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 4) <u>Non-Steerable Macph Strut, two lower ball joints, tie to ground</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 5) <u>5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 6) <u>Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 7) <u>Non/Steerable Macpherson Strut, steering arm to lower wishbone</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 8) <u>4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b> 9) <u>4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>10) <u>Trailing Arm with Two Cross Car Links</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>11) <u>Semi/Trailing Arm</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>12) <u>Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones with Steering Knuckle</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>14) <u>Double Wishbone with Push Rod Suspension</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>15) <u>Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>16) <u>Non/Steerable Lower </u></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><u><font face="Arial">A</font></u></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><u><font face="Arial"> Arm with Toe Link</font></u></b></font><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>17) <u>Double Wishbone, Push Rod, Mono-shock</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>18) <u>Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link, Drop </u></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><u><font face="Arial">S</font></u></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><u><font face="Arial"> Link</font></u></b></font><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>19) <u>Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin lower Link</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>20) <u>Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>21) <u>5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>22) <u>Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring Front</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>23) <u>Double Wishbone, Anti-Roll Bar</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>24) <u>Steerable Macpherson Stut, Twin Outer Ball Joints</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>25) <u>Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>26) <u>Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>27) <u>Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>28) <u>4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link</u></b><b></b><br>
|
||
<b>29) <u>Twist Beam </u></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><u><font face="Arial"> Twin Wheel</font></u></b></font><b></b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Some of these suspension types are steerable and in which case will appear as options for both front and rear suspension selections. Whilst non-steerable suspension types will only appear in the rear suspension list. The majority of these templates are just corner models, some axle templates are included. Users can convert these or their own corner templates to axle templates using the menu item <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"><i>Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model</i></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><i></i></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For steerable suspension types the steering mechanism type is selected separately from either a rack or steering box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm8.bmp" title="bm8.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the 3D Front Suspension Type<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It is possible to define your <u>own 3d templates</u>. These can be loaded automatically and either used as additions to the existing hard coded templates, replacements for or modifications of the hard coded ones. Templates that are loaded automatically are referred to as <font face="Arial">default</font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates. Users can also load additional </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">user</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> defined templates by browsing for an external file. All templates loaded from external files, (i.e. both default and user), are loaded into a certain template index. Thus it is possible to overwrite an existing hard coded template with a default or user template having the same index number. Similarly it is possible to overwrite a default template with a user template. The default templates are stored in a text file named </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">_User_Templates.Dat</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and is searched for in the programs startup folder. It is scanned for a program start-up and if found it is read and any extra templates loaded.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
It is possible to re-run the defaults loading process during a session, (without the need to restart), by using the menu item <i>File / Re-Read Default Templates</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Steering Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D front suspension templates are restricted to being </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">steerable</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. A steerable template has an identified point attached to the body that is articulated in a prescribed manner for the Steering </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">mode</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> of analysis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Two types of steering type are available;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>1) Steering Rack<br>
|
||
2) Steering Box<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The steering rack applies a linear displacement of the nominated track rod end along the Y-axis. No additional data points are required to define the steering rack. The defined steering travel is the linear distance in mm.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The steering box type requires additional geometry points to be added to identify the pitman point and steering arm axis. The defined steering travel for a steering box type is angular rotation of the steering arm.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm9.bmp" title="bm9.bmp"><br>
|
||
Steering box graphical display <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Box points highlighted<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm10.bmp" title="bm10.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the 3D Steering Articulation Type<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphical Interface<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The graphical interface consists of a conventional Windows style container window, with a top menu bar and a series of status panels along the bottom.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Optional toolbars are drawn by default to the left of the window, containing short cut icons to some of the main menus. The user can specify the visibility of the toolbars together with their position. Additionally the toolbars can be displayed as </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">floating</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> rather than anchored to one of the edges.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Floating toolbars can be re-docked to the required edge through picking and dragging to the new position, (note the outline shape will change to indicate docking).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The initial positions of the toolbars can be set via the <i>SetUp / Start Options / ToolBar Position</i> menu item, with <i>Top, Bottom, Left </i>or <i>Right</i> options available. This change is saved to the users <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ini</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> file and will be applied next time the application is re-started.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm11.bmp" title="bm11.bmp"><br>
|
||
Confirming the change in toolbar position<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The suspension graphics is drawn in the window titled <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">2D Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">3D Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> as appropriate for the current module setting. This window cannot be closed, but can be repositioned, re-sized and minimized. Only one graphic window can be opened by the application at a time, (i.e. you cannot open different models at the same time using different graphic windows in the way that a multi-document application like Word would).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm12.bmp" title="bm12.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 2D Graphic window<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Results graphs are displayed in individual windows. Each new graph added opening a new window. The graph windows can be moved, re-sized, closed and minimized. The title of the graph window reflects the plotted variable.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm13.bmp" title="bm13.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 3D Graph window<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
By default on start-up only the graphic window and toolbars are drawn, no graphs are displayed until they are added via the <i>Graph / New/Open</i> menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The settings for window positions, sizes and variables can be saved such that when the application is re-started all windows are re-opened in the same positions, see <i>SetUp / Save Window Settings</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Hard Point Dragging<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dragged</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen dragging. Point dragging can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or dragging in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm14.bmp" title="bm14.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Screen <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Dragging mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The majority of the point dragging functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sharing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> requires a switch between </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point dragging is one part of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode. The other two parts are direct editing and joggle editing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To indicate when the application is in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode not only are the relevant menus and icons </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">checked</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> but also </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">corners</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are added to the graphic display when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm15.bmp" title="bm15.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Screen <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Indicating in Dynamic View mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To change to editing mode un-select <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic viewing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> using <i>View / Dynamic Viewing / Off</i></font></font>. Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm16.bmp" title="bm16.bmp"><br>
|
||
Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in point dragging mode <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are drawn to indicate the current </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm17.bmp" title="bm17.bmp"><br>
|
||
Mouse Icon <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Cycles through tracking options.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Selecting any of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit icons</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Hard point joggling operates in a similar way to dragging with regard to available directions. The drawn joggle symbol indicates the number of joggle directions available. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via <i>SetUp / Gen Defaults&</i></font></font><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm18.bmp" title="bm18.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Screen shot of point joggle<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point dragging is affected by both Groups and Coincident points. The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and drag event into a potential single point pick but multiple point drag. In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm19.bmp" title="bm19.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Coincident point pick<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the <i>Solve / Point Coincidence</i> menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident can be changed via the <i>SetUp / Gen Defaults&</i> menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The default/standard method of model change during point dragging is to modify the position of a particular point, (or points for the case of a group), to its new position and hence change its relative position to any other point on the same part that hasn<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t been dragged. This </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">change</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode is referred to as </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Change Part Lengths</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. An alternative </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">change</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode has been added that allows the existing part geometry to be retained. In this </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Retain Part Lengths</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode only the hard points attached to the body (i.e. ground) can be selected and dragged, but when dragged all part lengths and hence point relevant positions are retained on each part in the model.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Groups<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
In the 3D mode the hard points can be formed into groups such that when one of that group is selected via the mouse and </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dragged</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, the other points in the group are dragged by the same amount, i.e. maintaining their relative positions within the group. This can be used for example to mimic moving a wishbone or suspension upright.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The only visible change to the graphic display when in group mode is that the number of </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">pickable</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> points is reduced to those in the group. Pickable points are drawn in a different colour and size to the non-pickable ones, (this can also be seen normally on static position versus incremental position, where only the static position can be picked). A further indicator as to the active use of a group is when in edit mode the drag lines are only drawn through the current groups</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> points.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm20.bmp" title="bm20.bmp"><br>
|
||
Group Selected <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Lower Wishbone Points Grouped<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The user can define any number of groups, a single point can be a member of any number of groups. Only one group can be current at a time. The group relationship is thus only applied when the group is current and the relationship taken from the point of making the group current.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Group data is saved with the model data file for subsequent re-use. Individual groups can be deleted from the model using <i>SetUp / Groups / Delete </i>selecting the required group to delete by its label.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Users can create groups using the <i>SetUp / Groups / Create...</i> menu item. Give the new group a unique label when prompted. A group is associated with either the front or rear suspension, you cannot add points to one group from both ends. Creating a group thus involves identifying how many points and which points are associated with the group.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm21.bmp" title="bm21.bmp"><br>
|
||
Group Creation <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Selecting the required points for a three point group<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The contents of an existing group can be edited through the <i>SetUp / Groups / Edit</i> menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once a group has been created it has no effect on hard point editing until the group is made current. To make a group current select the required group from the <i>SetUp / Groups / Current</i> menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm22.bmp" title="bm22.bmp"><br>
|
||
Making a Group Current<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To revert back to conventional data editing with all hard points available <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">cancel</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the group setting using the <i>SetUp / Groups / Cancel</i></font></font> menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
A temporary group can be created by the selection of a screen area, the created group will include all points within this selected region. A temporary group created in this way is disabled/cancelled in the same way as a conventional group, but once cancelled is then lost and would need to be re-created if required again. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Dynamic Viewing<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The main graphical window has dynamic viewing via the mouse, that allows translation, scaling and rotation (3D module only), of the suspension graphics.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Dynamic viewing shares the functional use of the mouse and its buttons with the hard point data editing, joggling and dragging functions. Thus to enable both dynamic viewing and editing to use the mouse you switch between the two modes. The </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> icon together with the associated menus indicate the status of these two modes, when checked the application is in dynamic view mode and the mouse and its buttons can be used to perform translation, scaling and rotation of the graphics model. Additionally the graphic display has symbols drawn in each corner as a visual indication that the application is in dynamic view mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm23.bmp" title="bm23.bmp"><br>
|
||
Dynamic Viewing <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Indicators marked<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The dynamic view mode has three options, (two in 2D), being Translation, Scaling and Rotation. Each of these options has its own icon and menu item, <i>View / Translate View, View / Scale View </i> and <i>View / Rotate View</i>. Selecting any of these options will enable dynamic viewing (if in data editing mode), or just change dynamic view type, (if already in dynamic view).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm24.bmp" title="bm24.bmp"><br>
|
||
Dynamic Viewing <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> View Type Icons<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The dynamic view modes use the motion of the mouse between key down and key release to change the view. The translate view mode simply follows the translation of the mouse within the current view plane. The Scale view mode uses the mouse vertical position to scale the current view plane. Moving the mouse up scales the view out, (i.e. model appears further away), whilst moving the mouse down scales the view in.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The rotate dynamic view, (only available in 2D), has two actions depending on the position of initial mouse selection point. Selecting towards the middle of the image will rotate the line of sight, whilst selecting towards the edge of the view will rotate the view around the line of sight only.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in dynamic view mode the right mouse button will cycle through the available dynamic view options.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Module<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 2D mode works with reduced hard points, i.e. no springs, dampers, pushrods etc., and is in the cross car view only (Y-Z plane). Construction lines are drawn to show instantaneous centres and kinematic roll centre positions. The user can define the required bump/rebound and roll camber, the bump/rebound and roll centre height and the roll centre lateral motion with roll angle. These are compared on the graphs to the current hard points actual solution or with one of the hard points </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">freed off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are used to illustrate on the suspension graphical display the point location that meets the derivative targets.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Note that steering is not considered in the 2D module as it is by definition a 3D phenomena.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm25.bmp" title="bm25.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D module graphics display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In most respects the functionality of the 2D module follows that of the 3D module in-terms of windows, graphics and graphs. Where relevant to the 3D module only features and menus will be disabled.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D module is intended to be a simplified analysis approach with both a reduced variable set and a reduced results set. Its restriction to the cross car plane means that it can not be applied to trailing and semi-trailing type suspensions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D module has only two basic suspension types, Double Wishbone and Macpherson Strut.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm26.bmp" title="bm26.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D Module template types <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> New model menu<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D module can be used as a simplified route to a full 3D module. Once you have achieved your required 2D characteristics use the convert to 3D option, <i>Solve / Convert 2D to 3D</i>, to produce a fully populated 3D single axle model.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Within the 2D module you can use conventional hard point editing, joggling and dragging techniques to modify the suspension derivatives. This the default 2D solve mode as is referred to as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Fix All</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, (<i>Solve / 2D Fix Option / Fix All</i></font></font>). In this Fix mode the suspension is fully defined/constrained and the displayed results are as constrained by the 2D mechanism. A range of alternative Fix modes are available where one of the hard point constraints can be <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Freed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> up to allow the required camber curve and roll centre height to define the suspension. These </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">required</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> curves must be defined through the relevant graphs </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">User Line</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data, (use the right mouse menu on the graphs to <i>Edit User Line&</i></font></font>.).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The various available <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Fix</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> modes are set via the <i>Solve /2D Fix Option</i></font></font> sub menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In the 2D module the point dragging has been extended to include selecting the Kingpin Axis point and changing its angle, selecting the ground offset point to change the Kingpin offset at the ground plane and selecting the tyre contact point to drag and change the track.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm27.bmp" title="bm27.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D Module <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Example Double Wishbone Top Outer </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Free</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"><br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<u><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></u><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Suspension Derivatives<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>1) Camber Angle<br>
|
||
2) Roll Centre Height<br>
|
||
3) Track Change<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
1) Camber Angle<br>
|
||
2) Roll Centre Height<br>
|
||
3) Roll Centre Lateral<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
All other suspension derivatives are either fixed, (such as Kingpin Angle), or not applicable to the 2D module, (such as toe angle).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm28.bmp" title="bm28.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D Sample Graph <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Includes User and Scope lines<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Suspension Derivatives<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D mode has four articulation types, bump/rebound, roll, steering and a combined mode. The combined mode allows the user to define an path of combined bump and steering to enable wheel envelopes to be established. The suspension derivatives calculated are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>Camber Angle (deg) <br>
|
||
Toe Angle (SAE definition) (deg)<br>
|
||
Toe angle (Plane definition) (deg)<br>
|
||
Castor Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Kingpin Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Damper 1 Ratio (-)<br>
|
||
Spring 1 Ratio (-)<br>
|
||
Anti Dive (%)<br>
|
||
Anti Squat (%)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Lateral (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre X (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Y (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Z (mm)<br>
|
||
Half Track Change (mm)<br>
|
||
Wheel base Change (mm)<br>
|
||
Damper 1 Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Spring 1Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Ackermann (%)<br>
|
||
Turning circle Radius (m)<br>
|
||
Castor Trail (mm)<br>
|
||
Castor Offset (mm)<br>
|
||
Kingpin Offset (at wheel centre) (mm)<br>
|
||
Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm)<br>
|
||
Mechanical Trail (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch X coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Y coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Z coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch X coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Y coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Tyre contact Patch Z coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Hub coordinate X coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Hub coordinate Y coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Right Hand Side Hub coordinate Z coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Hub coordinate X coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Hub coordinate Y coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Left Hand Side Hub coordinate Z coord (mm)<br>
|
||
Tyre Vertical Force (N)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Length (Front) (mm)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm ctr Y (Front) (mm)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm ctr Z (Front) (mm)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Length (Side) (mm)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm ctr X (Side) (mm)<br>
|
||
Swing Arm ctr Z (Side) (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height (to Body) (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height (to Ground) (mm)<br>
|
||
TCP dX/dZ Gradient (mm/mm)<br>
|
||
Damper 2 Ratio (-)<br>
|
||
Spring 2 Ratio (-)<br>
|
||
Damper 2 Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Spring 2Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Lunule Steer-Crescent (mm)<br>
|
||
Point <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">h</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Power (mm)<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The derivatives can be viewed either individually through the results graphs, select <i>Graphs / New/Open</i> to open a new/additional graph or via the suspension derivative results file (SDF).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The variable actually displayed on the graph is best changed/set by using the right mouse button on the graph of interest and using the <i>Y-Variable</i> menu list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm29.bmp" title="bm29.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graph Window <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Showing right mouse button Y-variable menu selection<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The SDF file can be displayed via the relevant icon or the <i>Results / List Formatted SDF File</i> menu. The SDF file can be displayed either as a formatted list or as a set of spline coefficients or just as spline data. These last two have a collection of user definable settings that control which articulation types, which results and which ends are shown in the lists.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm30.bmp" title="bm30.bmp"><br>
|
||
Extract of the formatted SDF file display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
All displayed graphs and SDF displays can be printed to produce hard copy records via the <i>print</i> menu options provided through the standard WindowsŽ printer dialogues.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm31.bmp" title="bm31.bmp"><br>
|
||
Extract of the SDF splines display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Limit Boxes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
For both modes, hard point </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">limit boxes</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> can be switched on, theses boxes are set to allow only a user specified amount of travel in a specific direction. Thus when switched on, a point, (or a group point), cannot be dragged outside of its limit box. These boxes could perform one of two functions, firstly they could be set to represent packaging limitations, or secondly to indicate production tolerances. In the second case the program can run a tolerance analysis for the chosen hard point at all extremes of the limit box, the spread on the chosen derivatives is displayed on the current graphs.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The display of limit boxes have three settings, <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">On</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> but visible and finally </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and invisible. There is no functional difference between the last two, it merely assists the clarity of the display by removing the additional graphical lines.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm32.bmp" title="bm32.bmp"><br>
|
||
3D Graphic Display showing Limit Boxes as On<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The behavior and functionality of Limit boxes is identical between the 2D module and the 3D module with the obvious exception of the reduction of tolerances in only two dimensions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To control the status of Limit boxes use the pull down menu <i>Graphics / Point Limits </i> sub menu to set as <i>Visible</i> or to set as <i>Use</i>, (note that in this context use means <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">On</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Un-checking <i>Use</i></font></font> will turn limit boxes off but remain visible, whilst un-checking <i>Visible</i> will set limit boxes to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> irrespective of the current setting).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The first use of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Limit Box</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is as a constraint on how far a hard points position can be moved in any direction whilst joggling or dragging.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If limit boxes are in use then you cannot </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Joggle</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">drag</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> a point such that it is moved outside of the limit box. Limit boxes are defined as separate +/- distances in each of the three axes, (or two for the 2D module), i.e. a total of six values for the 3D module and four for the 2D module.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Note that it is still possible to edit a point to a position outside of the limit box even when limit boxes are <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. In this instance the limit box is resized to accommodate the new position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If limit boxes are not in use, (visible or not), when a points position is changed by any of the edit modes, (edit, joggle or drag), the limit box is enlarged if the new position falls outside the currently defined points limits.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Because of this individual point editing, each suspension hard point has its own </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Limit Box</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dimensions. These can be individually re-set using the <i>Solve / Edit Point Tolerances&</i></font></font> menu, identify the required axle and point, and finally edit the values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm33.bmp" title="bm33.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the single point prior to editing the limit box settings<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To re-set the limit boxes for all point in one step, select <i>Solve / Set All Point Tolerances To&</i> menu and edit the required values, (note that you do not need to enter the negative directions as a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ve value, this is assumed).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm34.bmp" title="bm34.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the point limit box for all points<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The second use of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Limit Box</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is as a design/manufacturing tolerance analysis tool. This is used in conjunction with the <i>Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis</i></font></font> option to display on the graphs the spread of the current derivative over the defined limit box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Tolerance analysis is applied to a single point at a time, the suspension being solved for its current position, each corner and each mid point of the limit box cube, (total of 27 positions for the 3D module). Before being able to run the tolerance analysis the analysis hard point needs to be identified, (select from tree style selection box). Subsequent tolerance runs will not request for the analysis hard point as by default the previously selected point will be used. To change to a different tolerance point use the <i>Solve / Set Tolerance Point&</i> menu and identify the new point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm35.bmp" title="bm35.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example tolerance analysis Graphics and Graph displays<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
With tolerance analysis switched <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the model can be dynamically viewed and/or edited in exactly the same way as normally. Because of the increased number of solution loops the refresh time will be significantly increased. Once a tolerance point has been defined you can switch between tolerance on/off either via the menu <i>Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis</i></font></font> or the equivalent toolbar icon.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm36.bmp" title="bm36.bmp"><br>
|
||
Tolerance analysis toolbar Icon<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
Tolerance boxes when visible can be picked and dragged just like a suspension hard point. Select a tolerance box corner point with the left mouse button and drag (or joggle) it to the required position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphs<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
</font>The primary results display method for the application is through the derivatives graphs. Each graph show a single user selected derivative over the current suspension articulation. Any number of graphs can be opened and positioned within the display using either the <i>Graphs / New/Open</i> menu or equivalent icon.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm37.bmp" title="bm37.bmp"><br>
|
||
New Graph toolbar Icon<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In addition to plotting SDF on the graphs users can also plot Results from some of the graphical elements that have been added to the template, such as the distance between two points. These are then displayed and updated in the same way as SDF graphs. The only restriction is that Graphical element results are not involved in user lines and hence the optimizer.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The appearance and settings of each graph can be changed through either the <i>Graphs</i> pull down menu or the graph<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s right mouse menu. By selecting a graph with the right mouse button this implies that any changes made from the menu items is applied to the selected graph only.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm38.bmp" title="bm38.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graph right mouse button menu<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
As each new graph is opened the y-variable is taken as the next in the available list. To change the displayed variable, use the right-mouse menu and select from the available <i>Y-Variable</i> list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm39.bmp" title="bm39.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graph Y-variable list - right mouse button menu<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For a model with both front and rear axles defined, two data lines will be drawn one for each suspension end. They will use different symbols, line colours and show a key to aid identification of the two results. Similarly if both left and right hand wheels are displayed on the graphical display, so both lines will be drawn on the graphs, again using different line colours to identify them.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Eight lines per wheel can be displayed on each results graph, (ignoring repeat lines with tolerance analysis). These lines being the <b>Data Line</b> the <b>User Line</b> and 5x <b>Scope Lines</b>. The data line is the current hard points results. The user line is an editable curve principally for visually identifying the required targets for the derivative. The scope lines are for saving incremental results to enable comparison of subsequent changes to the stored plots.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
A number of menus are available to aid moving data between the Line data sets. These include;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Graphs / Copy Front/2D Data to User<br>
|
||
<i>Graphs / Copy Rear Data to User<br>
|
||
Graphs / Copy Front/2D Scope to User<br>
|
||
</i>Graphs / Copy Rear Scope to User<br>
|
||
Graphs / Clear Current User Line<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The <b>Scope</b> line data is <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">grabbed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> by using the menu <i>Graphs / Scope Line Store</i></font></font> and is cleared by using <i>Graphs / Clear Scope Store</i>. Scope lines are stored in positions 1 to 5. An exclusive option is available to just store the current to position one and empty all other scope lines as well as an option to grab the current line into scope position one having first shuffled any ther scope lines down one position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm40.bmp" title="bm40.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example graph showing all three line types displayed<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The deviation between the Data Line and the current Scope and User lines can be listed as a numerical sum. The displayed value is the cumulative sum of the difference for each calculated position. To display these values use <i>Graphs / Visibility Deviation Values</i>. The scope line used for the difference number can be changed to any of the five positions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm41.bmp" title="bm41.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example graph showing all deviation values displayed<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
As a useful aid to identifying suspension characteristics, the gradient of the displayed curves can be listed both next to each individual point and for the ride condition. To turn these on use the <i>Graphs / Visibility / Deviation Values</i>.<i><br>
|
||
</i><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm42.bmp" title="bm42.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example graph showing static gradient value highlighted<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Additional Graph properties that can be defined are;<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<i>Axis Scales</i>: Set the minimum and maximum x and y axis values. The autoscale option can also be used to automatically set the scales.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm43.bmp" title="bm43.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Visibility</i>: Set the visibility of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line User Line.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Colours</i>: Sets the colour of individual graph items, Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines + Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm44.bmp" title="bm44.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Line Markers</i>: Set the marker for individual graph lines, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear, User Line 2D and User Line 3D.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm45.bmp" title="bm45.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Switch x-y</i>: Switches the position of the x-y axis from the conventional x horizontal y vertical setup.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm46.bmp" title="bm46.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Marker Sizes</i>: Sets the size of the markers used for each line type, Data Marker, Scope Marker and User marker.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Text Sizes</i>: Sets the size of the text labels for, Graph Data Values, Compliance Title, Compliance Label and compliance value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<i>Decimal Points Display</i>: Defines the number of decimal points used to display numerical values. Individual values are X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, x-axis label, y-axis label and compliance graph.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Enhanced Graphics<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Enhanced graphical elements can be switched on for improved visualization of the defined model. These options have no impact on the numerical results being just aids to model viewing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm42.bmp" title="bm42.bmp"><br>
|
||
Enhanced Graphics Menu Item<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The elements affected by enhanced graphics are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Spring, Damper, Wheel (and tyre), Pivot Axes, Grid, Body, Tubes, Tri-Facets, Triad Symbol, Origin marker, C of G marker, Moving ground and wheels and Roll Axis. An additional set of <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">enhanced graphics</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> that indicate a distance measure also form part of the Enhanced graphics function. These provide distance (either in component form or resultant form) from point to point, point to line, line to line etc. Other graphics primitives such as circles, spheres, planes and cylinders also form part of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">enhanced graphics</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> set.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
For the Body element it is not sufficient to turn this <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> to get the graphical body image drawn, unless a body type has already been defined either in the file or from the <i>Data</i></font></font> menu. To add/modify a default Body to the model use the <i>Data / Body Type </i>sub menu<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm47.bmp" title="bm47.bmp"><br>
|
||
Enhanced Graphics body data menu<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The settings for enhanced graphics visibility are stored to the users ini file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To toggle the enhanced graphics visibility<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s use the <i>Graphics / Enhanced Visibility</i></font></font> menus or the equivalent view toolbar icons.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm48.bmp" title="bm48.bmp"><br>
|
||
Enhanced Graphics toolbar icons highlighted<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It is possible to view/edit all graphic settings through one single interface. This <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> display can be opened via the <i>Edit / All Settings</i></font></font> menu item or the <i>Ctrl +S</i> shortcut. This provides a single control point for all graphics settings with recourse to a large number of individual pull-down menu selections.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm49.bmp" title="bm49.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Display </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Graphics Tab Selected<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Defaults<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
All user definable settings are saved by the application when it has a normal program exit to its </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ini</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> file. The location of this ini file depends on the version of Windows currently being used. The file name is </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">shark.ini</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b></b></font> and will be saved to either C:\windows or C:\winnt. This file is not directly editable by the user but there are occasions when it is useful to understand where it is and what it stores.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
All colours, symbols, visibility, line types and graphics size defaults that can be set by the user are saved to this file. In addition it will retain window sizes, folder settings, and recent open files.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
At application start-up this file is searched for in the relevant Windows folder and if found read in to overwrite the internal default settings.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In some extreme instances this file can become corrupt preventing the application from correctly starting. It may in this instance be thus necessary to delete this file. Deleting this file will return all defaults to the internally <font face="Arial">hard coded</font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Data Entry<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Data entry is through standard Windows style dialogue boxes. These employ standard text and numeric widgets, together with check boxes and selection boxes. Spread sheet style entry where used supports cut and paste from external applications via the clipboard.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm50.bmp" title="bm50.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example spread sheet data entry<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When using <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">paste</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> into a Shark spread sheet it is only necessary to select the location of the top left hand cell of the paste are that the paste is intended to fill, do not drag and highlight the entire target area.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The main data entry to the program will be of the suspension hard points x,y,z co-ordiantes. The normal route to enter this is to select <i>File / New </i></font></font> and identify the required suspension end, (or both) and the required suspension template type(s). Each suspension template has default co-ordiante data associated with it to provide a easy model creation process. These default co-ordinates can be changed singularly through the on screen data edit modes of Edit, Joggle and Drag or be edited collectively through a spread sheet. The suspension data can be edited directly from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">File </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> New</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dialogue box at the point of model creation by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively it can be accessed at any time after model creation via the relevant Data toolbar icon.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm51.bmp" title="bm51.bmp"><br>
|
||
Data toolbar icon <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> suspension co-ordinates display<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Saving Hard Points<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
In the 3D module the suspension hard points can be saved either to a temporary storage for later recall during the program run, or saved to a new data file to provide a permanent record of the data input for subsequent program runs. The temporary storage facility is not available with the 2D module, the only recourse being to save the to disc as data files.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The menu item <i>Data / Coordinates Save&</i></font>option will open a text entry box to enable a unique <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">save-set</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> label to be entered. This label is how the user can identify, re-load and delete it at a later stage. Coordinate sets saved in this way are only to temporary storage. Once the application is exited all coordinate save-sets are lost.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm52.bmp" title="bm52.bmp"><br>
|
||
3D Save-Set <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Label Entry<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once a coordinate set has been saved it can be recalled via the relevant menu entry under <i>Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved</i> sub menu. Additional <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Save-Set</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> menu items are available to delete either individual save sets, (<i>Data / Coordinates / Delete /&.</i></font></font>) or all save-sets, (<i>Data / Coordinates / Delete All</i>).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm53.bmp" title="bm53.bmp"><br>
|
||
3D Save-Set <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Recalling a saved coordinate set<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Animation<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Both the 2D and 3D modules support animation of the defined models. The suspension system will be animated through a sequence of steps, appropriate to the current view mode. In the simplest mode this is over its current articulation distance, i.e. bump/rebound, roll, steer or combined. During the animation users can continue to edit and change co-ordinates, dynamically view the model or any other menu function as normally. To switch the animation on/off select the menu item <i>View / Animation (On/Off)</i></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm54.bmp" title="bm54.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Toolbar icons - Animate Icon highlighted<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in bump/rebound displacement type the animation display is affected by the current setting for ground plane solution type, (<i>Solve / Motion / Ground Plane)</i>. In one instance the body points are fixed and the ground plane is moved, whilst in the alternative case the ground plane is fixed and the body points are moved. This does not alter the numerical results for the suspension characteristics only the visual appearance of the animation.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm55.bmp" title="bm55.bmp"><br>
|
||
File Toolbar icons <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Ground plane Icons highlighted<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The animation function also applies to view modes other than displacement articulation. These include deformed geometry, modal shape and Forced-Damped response. A screen display mode tool, <i>View / Set Display Mode Tool&</i> allows control of these display modes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm56.bmp" title="bm56.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the Screen Display Mode<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Edit Undo<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
After a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. The menu item <i>Edit / Undo</i></font> can be used for this or more conveniently the equivalent short cut key strokes <b>Ctrl+Z</b>. If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The undo buffer length can be modified from the default value, (20 steps), via the <i>SetUp / Undo Buffer Length</i> menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm57.bmp" title="bm57.bmp"><br>
|
||
Edit undo buffer length setting<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The edit undo buffer is always emptied whenever a model is loaded or saved. Thus either of these actions will lose the stored changes and hence the ability to undo any previous changes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The undo buffer can be completely disabled if required by setting the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Buffer Length</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> to zero. The only conceivable reason for doing this would be if it was causing an unexplained failure or it was required to run two instances of the product on the same machine, (presuming you are licensed to do so), where the undo scratch files would attempt to overwrite each other.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
A by-product of the edit undo feature is that it is used to trap for machine / application failures. The temporary undo files are searched for on start-up and if found indicate a improper previous shut-down of the application. If detected the user is notified and the opportunity given to re-store the latest scratch file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm58.bmp" title="bm58.bmp"><br>
|
||
<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Data Recovery</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dialogue box<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Converting 2D to 3D<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Suspension hard points in the 2D mode can be converted to full 3D data set via a program option. The user selects the 3D suspension type required and gives the additional data requirements requested, i.e. wheelbase, kingpin angle etc. Thus migration from a simple 2D concept suspension model to a full 3D suspension is a simple procedure.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once the required 2D model has achieved the required suspension characteristics, to convert to 3D select <i>Solve / Convert 2D to 3D</i></font>. The displayed dialogue box requires the user to identify which of the valid default template types should be used, (this list will vary depending on the 2D template type used). In addition specific 3D properties need to be entered to assist in defining the properties in the third dimension.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm59.bmp" title="bm59.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D to 3D conversion data<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It is not possible to add a 2D converted model as the rear axle to an existing 3D model that has a front axle already defined. The existing 3D model data will be lost.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Managing User Lines<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
User Lines are displayed on the <u>graph</u></font> results to visually identify the required suspension characteristics as hard point geometry is modified. Since these user lines are not considered to be part of the model, they are not saved to the data file. Thus any entered target user lines are lost whenever the application is closed.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The mechanism for the creation, saving and data-basing of user lines is the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Manage User Lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> function. Managing user lines is through </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Data Sets</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, any number of data sets can be created on either the local machine or a networked server. Each data set can then contain any number of user line sets, (in this instance a </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">user line set</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> refers to a user line for each possible characteristic over each possible articulation mode).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The data set references are stored in the users <u>ini file</u> such that on program start-up these data sets are searched for and if found added to the menu list. Once on the menu list individual user line sets can be loaded from a data set and hence used within the result graphs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To create a new data set select <i>Graphs / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet&</i> and browse to the required file location, (creating a new folder if necessary).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm60.bmp" title="bm60.bmp"><br>
|
||
Creating a new Data Set<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
As part of the data set creation you will be required to define a unique label for the data set. This unique label is how the data set will be referred to when selecting sets from, sets to, or deleting from the list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm61.bmp" title="bm61.bmp"><br>
|
||
Defining the data set label<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Creating a data set will automatically add it to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">loaded</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data sets list. If you require to pick up a data set created by an other user, (and perhaps saved to another networked machine/server), use the <i>Graphs / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet&</i></font></font> use the browser in the conventional way to locate the required data set.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When initially created a data set will have no saved user line sets. You must subsequently add your user line sets to the required data set to make it available on subsequent re-use.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm62.bmp" title="bm62.bmp"><br>
|
||
Adding the current user lines definition to a data set.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once a data set contains user lines these can be subsequently used by selecting <i>Graphs / Manage User Lines / Load From</i> and then select the required data set and user line set, (remember that one data set can contain many user line sets).<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance Solving<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The standard solution technique within SHARK is for rigid body kinematic motion only. A separately licensed feature enables a linear complaint analysis to be superimposed on top of the incremental kinematic solutions. This allows users to perform modal analysis and Forced-Damped response.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To invoke the compliant solution select the <i>Solve / 3D Compliance</i></font> menu option, (note that the complaint solver is not available in the 2D module). If this menu item is <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">greyed out</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> you are not licensed for this feature, (check with your software vendor or local support staff).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm63.bmp" title="bm63.bmp"><br>
|
||
File toolbar icon - Enabling the compliant solver<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In its simplest form the compliant solver requires no additional data to be added to the model, (default values are assumed for tyre vertical stiffness and suspension spring rate and preload). It will treat all connection points as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">spherical rigids</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. In this form the rigids do have a stiffness value, but a high value. The default value for the rigids can be modified by the user, see <i>Data / Compliance Data / General Data&</i></font></font><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm64.bmp" title="bm64.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the default <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Rigids</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> stiffness value<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
With all rigid joints in the model, the only significant deflection will be caused by the flexibility of the tyre vertical stiffness. The deflection is caused by the suspension spring load. Tyre vertical stiffness values can be accessed through the <i>Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties&</i> menu (when in compliant mode) or through the equivalent <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Graph + Data</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar icon. Whilst the spring properties are accessed through the <i>Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties&<br>
|
||
</i></font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm65.bmp" title="bm65.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the compliance data spring properties<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Additional graphical display features are used within the compliant solver, the visibility of which is set under the <i>Graphics / Compliance Visibility</i> sub menu and their properties under the<i> Graphics / Compliance Colours </i>and <i>Graphics / Compliance Sizes</i> sub menus.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm66.bmp" title="bm66.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">all-rigid</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> compliant model graphical display.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
With the compliance model enabled additional results options are available. These include deflections and forces of the joints. Whilst deflections of the joints will be small, until we add compliant bushes, the joint forces can be used to list forces in the system due to the spring load.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
All rigid joints can be edited to have <u>compliant bush</u> properties with three translation and three rotation stiffnesses defined. The orientation of the bushes can be aligned along any user specified local coordinate system.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Additional <u>external forces</u> can be applied to the model, any number of forces can be attached to individual parts under user defined magnitude and direction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The majority of the kinematic plotting, editing and viewing functions are unchanged when using the compliant solver. The only exception involves the data editing of a suspension hard point. With the compliant solver on the data edit window is extended to include the points bush properties.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
You can toggle between kinematic and compliant solver types with no loss of data. Complaint bush properties and external forces are all saved as part of the model. Note that even if a model contains compliant data when it is first loaded into the application it will appear in kinematic mode.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance Bushes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The joints in a compliant model can be either rigid, (in which case they use the default high stiffness value), or bushed. Bushed joints require the user to define three translational stiffness rates values and three rotational stiffness rates, (although some may be zero, particularly the rotational rates).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In compliant solver mode picking a suspension hard point to edit will display not only the points coordinates but also its bush properties. To switch between a </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Ball Joint</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> (rigid) and a </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Bush</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> (compliant) check the required box in the edit display. When set to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">compliant</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the bush properties can then be edited.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm67.bmp" title="bm67.bmp"><br>
|
||
Bush Editing display <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Complaint option ringed.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The bush definition requires a local coordinate system to be defined and then three translation stiffnesses and three rotational stiffnesses. The stiffnesses are defined in this local bush axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Bush coordinate systems have their origin at the suspensions hard point coordinates. The local z-axis is then defined as either, an absolute position, a position relative to the origin, or as another point in the model. In the case of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">point in the model</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> this is a continuous setting such that if the reference point is moved the bush coordinate system is automatically modified.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
To complete the axis definition a second point is defined that is assumed to lie in the x-z plane. The point in a plane approach is used rather than a second axis point as it is easier to identify a plane rather than an orthogonal axis. This x-z plane point can be either in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates, (note relative to the origin not relative to the z-axis point).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The defined bush coordinate system can be seen on the 3D graphics display. Both the definition points and the actual orthogonal axes are drawn, subject to separate visibility switches. To ensure both are visible use <i>Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Axis Points</i> and <i>Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Bush Local Axes</i>. When these items are <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">checked</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> they will be drawn on the 3D display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm68.bmp" title="bm68.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the visibility options for the Bush axes.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If the bush axes definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are not drawn through them). Remember that if a z-axis point is defined as a model point then </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dragging</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the hard point will also drag the z-axis definition point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If using coincident points, bush axes definition points will appear on the point lists as model hard point number + 1000 or model hard point number + 2000. The +1000 point is the z-axis point whilst the +2000 point is the x-z plane point.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm69.bmp" title="bm69.bmp"><br>
|
||
3D Display - Bush axes visibility<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The bush axes definition points are displayed with labels Pz and Px-z, The local axis points have labels X<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, Y</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and Z</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To enable a Forced-Damped response to be predicted in the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">compliance</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode, damping values for each bush need to be defined. Default values are applied in a similar manner to stiffness, the setting for which can be edited through <i>Data / Compliance Data / General Data</i></font></font>. Note that for a bush the damping is defined in terms of a loss angle (deg). Damping is also included for the damper(s), this is editable as a property of the damper and is defined in conventional damping terms (N.s/m).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm70.bmp" title="bm70.bmp"><br>
|
||
Damping <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Editing the Damper Value<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance External Forces<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
External forces can be applied as part of the compliant model. External forces are defined in </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sets</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. The external forces can be applied either in isolation or in addition to the defined spring force. It is also possible to switch all external forces off, or individual force sets, (note you could turn both spring and external forces off and thus have no forces or compliant displacements in the model).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm71.bmp" title="bm71.bmp"><br>
|
||
Controlling the inclusion of the Spring Force<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The force set intended for interactive user use is the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">zero</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position set. By default an additional 7 further force sets are pre-filled to simulate Lotus </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">standard</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> analysis load cases. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">standard</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> sets are saved to the users ini file such that they may be modified to suit particular end users requirements. /users can add/delete user force sets as required. Each force set can contain any number of forces, each force having a defined magnitude attachment point and orientation. To edit the external force data select <i>Data / Compliance Data / External Forces&</i></font></font> <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The edit display shows one force set and one force in the set at a time to view the properties of other forces or sets use the two sets of arrow keys to migrate through the defined forces.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each force is associated to a suspension corner of the model, and a part of the model for that corner. Its properties include a magnitude and a direction defined by two points. The two points define the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">head</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tail</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> of the force. Head and tail definitions can be in absolute coordinates or relative coordinates. The relative coordinates being relative to a chosen hard point, (note that added to the hard points list is the tyre contact point).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm72.bmp" title="bm72.bmp"><br>
|
||
External Force Data Edit <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Add force to set highlighted<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each force set has its own <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on/off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> setting, likewise each individual force within a force set has a separate </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on/off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> allowing complete customisation of the defined forces.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm73.bmp" title="bm73.bmp"><br>
|
||
External Force 3D Display <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Longitudinal Force to TCP<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
External forces are displayed on the 3D graphical display. The display shows both the definition points and the force vector. The external force visibilities are set via <i>Graphics / Compliance Visibilities</i> individual menu items are available the force vector and the force definition axis. External force vectors can be drawn either in fixed length form or at a scaled length, (scaled length based on magnitude). To change the fixed length size, or the magnitude scalar, edit the relevant fields in <i>Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit Sizes&</i> Note that changing the visibility setting of forces to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> does not imply that they are not used in the calculation of forces.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm74.bmp" title="bm74.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting external force visibilities and style<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If the force axis definition points are visible they can be dynamically picked and edited on screen just like any hard point, (the only difference is that to avoid cluttering the display, the current <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are not drawn through them). Remember that if an axis point is defined as relative to a model point then </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dragging</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the hard point will also drag the axis definition point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If using coincident points, force axes definition points will appear on the point lists as force number + 3000 or force number + 4000. The +3000 point is the head axis point whilst the +4000 point is the tail axis point.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Only one force set can be displayed on the 3D display at any one time. By default this is the zero set. The results displayed in the graphs will also be those of the currently displayed force set. Thus when changing to a different force set both the 3D display and the graphs change to reflect the new load set.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The main use of multiple load sets is to provide a set of <u>compliance coefficients</u> based on standard analysis cases. These can show at a glance the overall compliant response of the suspension model.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance Coefficients<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The compliance coefficients function is aimed at providing a single display of the overall compliant behavior of the vehicle model when subjected to a series of standard forces.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
A number of <u>external force</u></font> sets are defined that together specify a series of tests. Each force set can contain a number of different forces that are applied to various parts with defined magnitude and direction. To assess the complaint response to these force sets using the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">standard</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graphs is time consuming and not immediately visual. The compliant coefficients display provide a overall user definable summary of the compliant response.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
To display the coefficients display select <i>Results / Display Compliance Values&</i> The display shows for each force set, (including force set 0), a series of bar charts. The number of bars displayed on each forces sets chart depends on both the number of axles modelled and the number of variables selected.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm75.bmp" title="bm75.bmp"><br>
|
||
Compliance Coefficients display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each bar represents the difference between the kinematic value and the compliant value of the chosen variable at the static ride condition. The compliant value can optionally include the spring force, (see right mouse menu on display).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The height of the bar is controlled by a notional scalar, each variable in each force set has its own full screen deflection scalar. To edit the scalar values select the required variables bars with right mouse button and select <i>Edit Scale Setting</i>. Note that the right mouse menu will appear in either <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">brief</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">long</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> form depending if the right mouse pick is on a bar area or just on the chart.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm76.bmp" title="bm76.bmp"><br>
|
||
Compliance Coefficients <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">long</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> menu form<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Variables can be added to or removed from a individual load sets display using the <i>Add Extra Variable </i>and <i>Remove Selected Variable</i> right mouse menu items. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each bar can have its own guide limit line added to its display, (by default all values are set as 0 and hence don<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t appear). This is intended to provide a visual guide to the target curve without needing to read the numerical values of each bar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm77.bmp" title="bm77.bmp"><br>
|
||
Guide Lines Added to Set 1 display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
By default, force set zero is the set displayed on the 3D display and in the graphs. This is indicated on the Compliance display by the red box around its chart. To change the display<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s to show one of the other force sets use the <i>Make Force Set Default</i></font></font> option from the right mouse menu. The red highlight will then indicate the change and the displays refreshed.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The right mouse menu also provides an easy method for turning individual force sets <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, (<i>Turn Force Set </i></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><i><font face="Arial">Off</font></i></font><font face="Times New Roman"><i><font face="Arial">)</font></i></font>, gaining access to the external force data, (<i>Open External Force Edit),</i> make all force sets on, (<i>Turn All Force Sets On</i>) and toggle the inclusion of the spring force in the compliance calculations, (<i>Include Spring force in Set)</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Deformed Geometry Animation<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
As with the kinematic solution the compliant model can be <u>animated</u></font> over the currently specified articulation. The additional feature of animating the displacements of the compliant model is the inclusion to the display of the calculated forces. To set the visibility of the calculated forces set <i>Graphics / Compliance Visibility / Calculated Forces.</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The additional animation type that can be applied to a compliant model is that of the deformed geometry. This is similar in concept to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">mode shape</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> animation used in Finite Element packages. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm78.bmp" title="bm78.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Deformed Geometry Plot<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Deformed geometry animation, cycles through a series of display steps between the kinematic solutions positions and the compliant position. This animation is performed for a specific articulation position, (normally the ride position), although the user can select which animation position to animate at, (<i>View / Deformed Geometry Position</i>). Where 0 is the ride position 1 is the first bump/roll or steer position, (as appropriate). If the position number entered is greater than the number of increments it will be clipped to the maximum.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Because the deformations can be small animating in steps between kinematic and compliant may need scaling to enhance visualization. The deformed geometry scalar can be set by <i>View / Deformed Geometry Scalar</i>. The setting of this will distort all displayed 3D compliant images, so should be set back to 1.0 when not required.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm79.bmp" title="bm79.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the deformed geometry scalar<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Deformed geometry animation can be turned <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> with one of two options, <i>View / Animation (On/Off), </i></font></font>with Screen Display Mode set to <i>Deformed Geometry</i>. The two options are with or without spring forces. Whilst both options function in the same way the second option will illustrate the bush deflection due to the applied external forces only and not the combination of external forces and spring force. The <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Set Display Mode</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tool allows a convenient single point to control animation and display modes, <i>View / Set Display Mode Tool</i></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm80.bmp" title="bm80.bmp"><br>
|
||
Specifying Deformed Geometry Display via the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">display mode</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tool.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Hard Point Joggle<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension hard points can be selected from the screen via the mouse and </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">joggled</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> to a new position, the suspension derivatives being re-calculated as the hard point is moved. The selected derivatives that are being displayed graphically are updated during the hard point screen joggling. Point joggling can be in a 2D view along both viewed axes, a single axis or joggling in a 3D view along a selected axis direction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm18.bmp" title="bm18.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Screen <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Joggling mode, tracking lines show Y axis direction.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The majority of the point joggling functionality is performed using a combination of left and right mouse buttons. The mouse buttons are also used extensively for the dynamic viewing option and thus this <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sharing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> requires a switch between </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point joggling is one part of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode. The other two parts are direct editing and point <u>dragging</u></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To indicate when the application is in <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode not only are the relevant menus and icons </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">checked</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> but also </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">corners</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are added to the graphic display when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm15.bmp" title="bm15.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Screen <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Indicating in Dynamic View mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To change to editing mode un-select <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic viewing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> using <i>View / Dynamic Viewing / Off</i></font></font>. Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm16.bmp" title="bm16.bmp"><br>
|
||
Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in point joggling mode <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are drawn to indicate the current </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> direction(s). To change the current tracking direction the right mouse button will cycle through the available tracking direction options. A similar action is achieved by selecting the mouse icon from the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm17.bmp" title="bm17.bmp"><br>
|
||
Mouse Icon <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Cycles through tracking options.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Selecting any of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit icons</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The joggle symbol indicates the number of tracking directions available and also which of the four arrow keys, (left, right, up and down), is likely to be used. To use joggle select either Ctrl + Arrow Key for coarse joggle or Shift + Arrow Key for fine joggle. The joggle fine size is a tenth of the coarse size, the coarse size can be set via <i>SetUp / Gen Defaults&</i></font></font><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm81.bmp" title="bm81.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the default Coarse Joggle Step Size<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point joggling is affected by both <u>Groups</u> and <u>Coincident points</u>. The settings for groups and point coincidence change a single point pick and joggle event into a potential single point pick but multiple point joggle, (using a temporary group). In the case of groups, the current groups points are all translated by the same amount. Whilst for point coincidence only the point or points selected from a displayed list are moved, again all selected points are moved by the same amount.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm19.bmp" title="bm19.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Coincident point pick<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The coincident point selection feature is switched on via the <i>Solve / Point Coincidence</i> menu. When switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the <i>SetUp / Gen Defaults&</i> menu. A similar tolerance exists to control whether a point is within the pick region.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Point Coincidence<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Point Coincidence function controls the modification of hard point coordinates. When enabled selecting a point that is in close proximity to another the user is prompted to identify, which of the points within the coincidence tolerance is to be edited. To enable point coincidence select <i>Solve / Point Coincidence</i></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm82.bmp" title="bm82.bmp"><br>
|
||
Enabling point coincidence<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Coincidence tolerance defines the radius in the view plane from the picked point that is used to check for coincident points. If coincident points are found a menu is displayed listing the points found. You can then either select one of the identified points or <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">All Points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Selecting </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">all points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is equivalent creating a temporary group, all points are then moved by the same amount, (note that this does not make them coincident).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm19.bmp" title="bm19.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Coincident point pick<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When the coincident point function is switched off the nearest point to the picked position is always selected. The tolerance used to decide whether two points are coincident, can be changed via the <i>SetUp / Gen Defaults&</i> menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm83.bmp" title="bm83.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the Coincident point tolerance<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Data File Text Editor<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Data file text editor is a dialogue box that can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To load a saved data file into it use the local menu <i>File / Open</i></font> alternatively to load the current model into the display select from the local menu <i>File / Load Current</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Any edited changes can either be saved to a file , <i>File / Save </i> or <i>File / Save As</i> or the current model can be updated with the contents of the text display using <i>File / Make Current</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Note that the current model and the data text display are only synchronized when a <i>Load Current </i>or <i>Make Current</i> command has just been made. Once a data change in either has been made they will only then be synchronized when the change is <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">made current</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> to the other.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm84.bmp" title="bm84.bmp"><br>
|
||
Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Text Data File Editor<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Hard Point Editing<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Hard point editing is the simplest method of editing single suspension hard points values. In the 3D <u>module</u></font> complete display and editing of the hard points can be carried out via the alternative <u>spread sheet display</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The mouse buttons are used extensively for both editing and the dynamic viewing option and thus this <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sharing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> requires a switch between </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Direct editing is one part of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode. The other two parts are point dragging and joggle editing.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
To indicate when the application is in <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode and when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode not only are the relevant menus and icons </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">checked</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> but also </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">corners</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are added to the graphic display when in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm15.bmp" title="bm15.bmp"><br>
|
||
Graphics Screen <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Indicating in Dynamic View mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To change to editing mode un-select <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic viewing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> using <i>View / Dynamic Viewing / Off</i></font></font>. Alteratively select the dynamic viewing icon from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm16.bmp" title="bm16.bmp"><br>
|
||
Dynamic Viewing Icon- Shown as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in edit mode <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking lines</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are drawn to indicate the current </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tracking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> direction(s). This is not relevant to the hard point-editing mode as tracking only applies to the dragging and joggle edit modes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Selecting any of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit icons</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes the mode to edit and cancels the dynamic view mode. In a similar way selecting any of the three dynamic view icons changes to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">dynamic view</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
When in direct editing mode to edit a point select it with the left mouse button on the graphics display. The displayed dialogue box will be different if in the 2D module or the 3D module.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm85.bmp" title="bm85.bmp"><br>
|
||
2D Direct Data Editing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
3D data editing lists the selected hard points x, y and z co-ordinate. To change simply edit and select <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Ok</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Note that the cancel button or the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Esc</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> key will close the edit box and ignore any changes. To subsequently undo a change, use the <u>undo</u></font></font> function.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm86.bmp" title="bm86.bmp"><br>
|
||
3D Direct Data Editing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Import and Export to Adams Sub Systems<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
A utility routine is provided that enables suspension hard point coordinates to be transferred to and from an Adams sub-system model. This transfer is facilitated by the use of a supplementary text string that can be assigned to each hard point within Lotus Suspension Analysis (LSA). This text string is the label that is used within the Adams sub-system (and thus relies on consistent naming within your Adams sub-systems). The routine works on one end at a time since an Adams sub-system model would normally only have a single suspension corner modeled. Thus if the LSA model is a full vehicle, the user needs to identify which LSA end is to be used. See local menu setting under </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"><i>Data / Import to Front</i></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"><i>Data /Import to Rear</i></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. The same setting is assumed on Export only the local menu text changes.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm87.bmp" title="bm87.bmp"><br>
|
||
The Import/Export Display , Shown for Import, <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">scale</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">switch</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> items highlighted.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The import and export routine also has the option to shift the values, scale the values and switch the axis order. On import the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is added to the value in the Adams sub-system, whilst on export the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is subtracted from the LSA value. A shift value can be defined independently for x, y and z. A similar editing display is provided for the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">scale</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> settings, the default values for which are 1.0.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm88.bmp" title="bm88.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing The <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values for Import and Export.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The axis switch settings are set through a selection display. The default setting is for direct association of equivalent axes, i.e. x with x etc. This can be changed should a switch be required.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm89.bmp" title="bm89.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing The <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Switch</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> settings for Import and Export.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The individual point text strings are stored as part of the template descriptions. Thus they can either be edited through the normal template editor dialogue display on the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tab or they can be edited from within the Import/Export window via the <i>Data / Edit Point Label Strings</i></font></font> menu option. In both case these settings would need to be saved either with the data file, (by enabling template save to the data file, see settings menu options) or by saving the modified template as a user defined or custom template. Each point can have three associated text strings, the first is for the point position whilst two others are provided to identify local bush axis positions. All text fields are optional and can be set to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Not Defined</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> if not required or unknown. A special text description </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">DERIVED</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is used for some points such as the stub axle point and the strut lower slider axis point. These are not extracted directly from the sub system file but are calculated either in the case of the strut point from the other points or as in the case of the stub axle point, from additional extracted data values. The point strings can also be math</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s functions such as [(P1+P2)/2.0]. The use of a math</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s function is indicated by the use of square brackets [ ] to bound the string. This indicates that the point string should be treated as a math</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s string with reference to other points via their position in the template i.e. P4 is the fourth point in the template. As points are processed in order it is possible to use this sequence to use a math</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s function to define point 5 and then reference point 5 in a latter points definition, say point 8. Note that the point number is position in the template and not the local </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">point number</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> as defined in column 1 of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tab of the template editor. The math</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s function reader is loosely based around Fortran syntax. Key intrinsic functions recognized include, SQRT, SIN, COS, TAN, SIND, COSD, TAND, ASIN, ATAN, ACOS, ASIND, ACOSD, ATAND, LOG10, SINH, COSH, TANH, LOG, EXP AND ABS. The standard symbols +, -, * (for multiply), /, **(for power) are used whilst simple round ( ) brackets can be used within the string to force computation sequence.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm90.bmp" title="bm90.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Text <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Strings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> through the Template Editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
From within the Import display three menu items are provided to access the three text fields, <i>Data / Edit Point Label Strings, Data / Edit Bush Z-axis Label Strings</i> and <i>Data / Edit Bush X-Z Plane Label Strings</i>. These provide a local means of editing the template settings. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm91.bmp" title="bm91.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the point label strings from the import display.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Additional strings are used to identify supplementary model data. They also provide a means by which <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">left</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">right</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is identified since this may be subject to local language issues. The <i>Data / Edit General Label Strings</i></font></font> menu item displays these current settings. Because they are considered local user settings rather than model specific they are saved as part of the users ini file. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm92.bmp" title="bm92.bmp"><br>
|
||
Changing the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">General</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Settings Strings.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To import hard points from a sub model first ensure that the relevant point strings and general strings are correct for the current template. Open the import display and use the <i>File / Open (sub system) </i>to locate and load the required sub system model. The data extraction can be previewed in the lower display section using the <i>File / Import Hard Points (Preview)</i> menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm93.bmp" title="bm93.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Hard Point Import, template type 1.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To populate the current LSA model with the values extracted from the sub-system use the <i>File / Import Hard Points.</i> If settings have been changed from the default for the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">scale</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">switch</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> they are applied in the order </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Shift</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> then </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Scale</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and then </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Switched</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The Export function works in the same manner as Import but the order of shift, scale and switch is reversed. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Adding a Hard Point to a Model<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The number of hard points in a model is controlled by the appropriate template. Points can be added by modifying the template using the standard template editor, see <i>File / Edit Templates</i></font> menu item. Additional points can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via the <i>Edit / Add Point</i> menu items. These added points would not normally be used to modify the overall connectivity but more likely be used to add additional user graphics.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm94.bmp" title="bm94.bmp"><br>
|
||
Adding a Hard Point to the existing model, add options highlighted.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Points can be added through the menu either to ground (i.e. the body) or to any picked part. When adding to the body the user must provide the new position in global coordinates. A point added to an existing part can be added in absolute coordinates, relative to a point or between two points. When adding points to a part, once the part is picked the display will switch to just show that part and its associated points in a similar manner to the free body display. When in <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Part</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> pick mode, the part labels are made visible and the part </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">centre</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> points drawn.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm95.bmp" title="bm95.bmp"><br>
|
||
Adding a Hard Point via the template editor, .<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Adding Graphics to a Model<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Graphical elements are stored as part of the template structure and control the visual appearance of a model. The user can add additional graphics elements by direct editing of the template through th e standard template editor, see <i>File / Edit Templates</i></font> menu item. Additional graphical elements can be added to a model directly through the graphical viewer via a series of menu items under the <i>Graphics / Add</i> sub-menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm96.bmp" title="bm96.bmp"><br>
|
||
Adding a Graphical Element to the existing model, add options highlighted.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each added element is appended to the current template list, thus by adding graphics from the menu the user is modifying the template. To retain these changes users need to ensure they save the modified template either by inclusion into the data file, or by saving the template to a custom or user template file. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Graphical elements can be picked on screen and deleted if required. Again this will remove them from the current template and permanent changes would need to be saved as indicated above.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The list of available graphical elements is broken down into nine sub sections listed below;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Line<br>
|
||
|
||
Cylinder<br>
|
||
|
||
Circle<br>
|
||
|
||
Sphere<br>
|
||
|
||
Facet<br>
|
||
|
||
Plane<br>
|
||
|
||
Distance<br>
|
||
|
||
Components<br>
|
||
|
||
Angle<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each sub section has a number of specific ways of defining the associated primitive.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Lines:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Vector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Xvector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Yvector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Zvector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Plane-Norm:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Pnt-UserVector:</font></font></font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Cylinders:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pivot:</font> Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Tube:</font> Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Vector-Radius-Length:</font> Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Circles:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Cntr-Rad-Norm:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Cntr-Pnt-Plane:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Normal:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Spheres:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt Radius:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt Radius:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt Dia:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Facets:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:</font> Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:</font> Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Planes:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:</font> Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-X-Y Plane:</font> Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-X-Z Plane:</font> Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Y-Z Plane:</font> Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-UserVector Plane:</font> Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Distance<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt Dist:</font> Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Line Dist:</font> Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Line-Line Dist:</font> Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Plane Dist:</font> Adds a points<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Components<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt Comps:</font> Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components. <br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Line Comps:</font> Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components. <br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Line-Line Comps:</font> Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Plane Comps:</font> Adds a points<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>
|
||
Angles:<br>
|
||
</b><font color="#0000ff">Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:</font> Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Individual graphical element types have their own specific data requirements some are unique to each element and others are relevant to each class of element. These settings and values can be edited by picking the relevant element. Hint, hover over the approximate centre of an element and check the status bar prompt to confirm required element will be selected.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm97.bmp" title="bm97.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>A <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Pnt-Plane Dist</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Graphical Element added to a type 1 model.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Free Body Graphical Display<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The free body display mode can be switched on via the <i>View / Free Body Diagram& </i></font>pull down menu. When enabled the display changes to show only the selected part and it<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s associated points, graphical elements and forces. In this mode the interface functions exactly as normal, i.e. dynamically viewed, animated, edited etc but only that parts elements are involved. A small selection box is used to control the free body mode enabling the user to select the required corner and part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm98.bmp" title="bm98.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the Part for Free Body Display.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The free body mode can be cancelled either by un-checking the menu item that was used to enable it, or by closing the free body selection box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm99.bmp" title="bm99.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example free body display for a lower wishbone in compliant mode.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Kinematic Sum Display<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The kinematic sum display is a means by which the weighted sum of the deviations of selected results when compared to a target value can be displayed. This single value allows a simple metric to be used to compare a change in a particular suspension property effect over a whole range of results.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm100.bmp" title="bm100.bmp"><br>
|
||
Kinematic Sum Display.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Results that can be included into the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sum</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> include all graphs results, (visible or otherwise), and all compliance bar graphs. Individual weighting factors can be applied to each selected result. A number of convenience functions are provided to automatically set these weighting values mostly based around the current display axes settings. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The sum value is the cumulative of all individual deviations from target. In the case of the compliance coefficients these targets are set by selecting each bar chart in turn and defining the required value. In the case of the characteristic graphs, (i.e. toe, camber castor etc.), the target line is the user line set for each graph. The deviation is then the difference between either the single target value (for the compliance coefficients) or the average of the differences of the actual curve from the defined line for a characteristic graph.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm101.bmp" title="bm101.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example Characteristic Graph, showing its contribution to the sum.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The importance of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Kinematic Sum</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is that since it can be used by the user to view the impact of a single change on a set of potential compromise results, it can also be used by an optimization routine as indicating the direction of change for achieving an optimum design. This optimization potential is covered in the next section.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> The Internal Optimizer<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The kinematic sum is used to apply a sensitivity-based optimization to the model. Parameters are defined that have a start value, range and increment. Parameters can be point position, bush stiffness and bush orientation. The Kinematic sum as discussed previously can optionally include any characteristics graph or compliance coefficient.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm102.bmp" title="bm102.bmp"><br>
|
||
Expanded Optimizer Display, <i>View / Details</i> option checked.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The settings for the optimization are editable through a single display. With sections for defining which results to include, weightings to apply and settings for parameters.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm103.bmp" title="bm103.bmp"><br>
|
||
Optimizer Parameter Summary.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Parameters are applied in reverse sensitivity order, the most sensitive applied last. A sensitivity threshold value is applied such that parameters that do not significantly affect the sum can be automatically screened. As the optimization is proceeding the graphical display is updated and a rolling display shows the changes to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">sum</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm104.bmp" title="bm104.bmp"><br>
|
||
Optimizer Rolling Sum Display.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once the optimizer run has finished the user is asked to confirm acceptance of the changes. Selecting <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">no</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will return the model to the pre-run condition. User can stop a run early either through manual interjection or through a software defined minimum target value.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Display Units<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The units used in the display of both the data and the results can be changed from the default settings of Angle - deg, Length </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mm, Mass - kg and Force - N to other available options. The options are given below for each variable type. A user defined </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">unit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option is also available for each parameter.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
Angle:
|
||
Radian<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
MilliRadian<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Degree (default)<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Minutes<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
User-Defined<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Length:
|
||
Meter<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
milliMeter (default)<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
User-Defined<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Mass:
|
||
Kilogram (default)<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
User-Defined<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Force:
|
||
Newton (default)<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
decaNewton<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
User-Defined<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It must be remembered that this is a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">viewing</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option only and data files will always be saved using the original </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> unit settings. This also applies to the text editor within the program since this is merely an editor of </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">saved</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data files.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The units can be set either from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">New Model display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or directly from the menu items <i>View / Change Units</i></font></font>. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm105.bmp" title="bm105.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Opening the units Tool from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">New model</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> display.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The settings for each unit includes a scale factor, the number of decimal points (to add or remove compared to the default settings) and the label.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm106.bmp" title="bm106.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Changing the units display.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
These view unit settings are saved as part of the users configuration <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ini</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> file and are not saved with the data file. Whilst the units can be changed at any time, it should not be carried out when you have a data display window open as this could lead to incorrect data unit conversions. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Modal Analysis<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Modal analysis can be applied to any compliant model. To correctly predict modal frequencies and shapes the part masses and bush stiffness</font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> must be defined. The modal analysis calculates as many natural frequencies as there are degrees of freedom in the model. Frequencies are sorted into ascending order and the user can select an individual mode to view/animate. Mode shapes can be selected and animated via the <i>View / Set Display Mode Tool</i></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm107.bmp" title="bm107.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the display mode to Mode Shape <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 8th mode Selected.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The required mode shape can either be set via the selection box to the right of <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">mode shape</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toggle or through the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Modal Frequencies</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> results plot. To display the Modal Frequencies results plot select <i>Results / Modal Analysis Display</i></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm108.bmp" title="bm108.bmp"><br>
|
||
Modal Frequencies Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 8th mode Selected.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
The selected modal shape is also shown drawn or animated in the main 3d view with an associated scalar. This allows the user to view each mode shape in turn.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm109.bmp" title="bm109.bmp"><br>
|
||
Modal Frequencies Main View <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 5th mode Selected.<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Forced-Damped Analysis<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Forced damped analysis takes a compliant modal and calculates the amplitudes of all points in the model over a specified frequency range under the current force set. Defining the required force set is important as this controls which natural modes will be excited. The force can optionally include the spring force(s). Damping is added to the model for both the damper elements and the bushes. Bush damping is defined by a loss angle setting whilst the damper elements have their damping directly defined.<br>
|
||
</font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm110.bmp" title="bm110.bmp"><br>
|
||
Changing the View to Forced Damped <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 15.4 Hz selected<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The forced-damped display can be for any specified frequency. This can be set either via the slider in the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">set display mode</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dialogue box or directly in the value entry. In addition the response of the system through a complete frequency sweep can be displayed, <i>Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display</i></font></font>. The displayed graph can be control to set the required range and amplitude scales. Because this speed sweep is relatively time consuming to perform, (in Shark terms at least), this speed sweep display is only updated when first opened or when the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">refresh</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option is selected.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm111.bmp" title="bm111.bmp"><br>
|
||
Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 15.4 Hz point shown<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
As with the modal analysis the forced-damped response for the current frequency can be viewed/animated in the main window with a defined scaler.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Creating a Full Axle Model<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The simplest type of template is for an independent suspension based on a single corner, (one wheel). For some suspension types such as rigid axles you will always need to model both wheels in the initial template. Whilst with independent suspensions you have the option to make them single wheel or double wheel template. If it is required to analyze the impact of suspension parts that connect both corners together such as steering rack, anti-roll bar and sub-frames then a full axle model would be required.<br>
|
||
</font><br>
|
||
To convert a corner template to a full axle you can either edit the template directly through the template editor, <i>File / Edit Templates </i>or use the convenience data menu options. If you edit the template directly you will need to duplicate all the existing points changing the default Y co-ordinate to be the mirror of its partner, tag the specific points such as upper ball joint(2) and set the point symmetry options. Far simpler is to use the convenience function <i>Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model</i> which completes all this for you.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm112.bmp" title="bm112.bmp"><br>
|
||
Default Template 1 converted to full axle model<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Once converted to a full axle template you can now add features such as the compliant rack and anti-roll bar. Further convenience functions are available to simplify these tasks. The compliant rack add menu <i>Edit / Add Two Part Rack to Model</i> option requires the user to identify which part the roll-bar drop link should be attached to. Once selected the user is prompted for a point position and then all necessary modifications are made to the template. It should be remembered that this template modification needs to be saved, either as a custom template, user template or saved with the data file (<i>Setup / Include User Templates In Data Files).<br>
|
||
</i><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm113.bmp" title="bm113.bmp"><br>
|
||
Anti-roll Bar Added to Full axle version of Default Template 1.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To add a compliant rack to the template use <i>Edit / Add two Part Rack to Model</i>, this just requires both the left and right steering attachment points have been tagged in the template so that the rack can be correctly included into the model.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Overview </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> User Defined Custom Controls<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Users who wish to build their own custom displays can do so through the <i>Window / Open New Custom Control Display</i></font> menu option. Dialogue boxes created in this way can be distributed to other users as saved specification files. Individual user settings are saved as part of the ini file such that they are available for repeat use.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm114.bmp" title="bm114.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example custom template dialogue box- showing data sliders<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
These custom displays are completely editable not only in terms of widget content but also the associated commands, data values and results. Thus a custom display can be used to group a set of specific data variables together into a single window with some specific menu commands. Alternatively they may provide a collection of results graphs for standard results viewing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm115.bmp" title="bm115.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example custom template dialogue box - showing data and results options<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To create your own custom display, select the <i>Window / Open New Custom control Display</i> menu option. This will display a new empty display, (save for simple text widgets). To change the display, select the 'Edit' option. You can modify, add and delete widgets from the display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm116.bmp" title="bm116.bmp"><br>
|
||
New display in 'edit' mode<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To delete an existing widget(s) select the widget with the mouse and 'delete'. The right mouse menu has a number of functions that allow you to align widgets to improve appearance.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Widget types that can be added include, Buttons, Toggles, Sliders, Text Display/Entries, Value Display/Entries, Icon Buttons, Gauges, SDF Graphs, Bar charts and Bars. Each has a set of properties that can be edited via the 'Properties' option. The properties specific to the dialogue box can be edited through the right mouse menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm117.bmp" title="bm117.bmp"><br>
|
||
Properties display for dialogue box<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Users can save the settings for a particular display such that it can be shared with other users. Custom control settings are automatically include in a users ini file for future use. To save it for use by other users, in 'Edit' mode select the save option and define the required file name and location. Users can then use the 'load' option to use this file to create their own copy of it. A custom control display is not lost by simply closing the display, its settings are saved and is available from the list of displays at any time in the future. To permanently remove a custom display from the list you must use the 'WinDelete' option whilst in 'Edit' mode.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Start-up Steps<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Starting the program can be considered to consist of the following steps;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
1) Start the executable, locate either from the <b>Start</b></font> menu, (normally <i>Start / Programs / Lotus Engineering Software / Lotus Suspension Analysis</i>), or through explorer. Browse to the installed folder (normally c:\lesoft), and run the suspension analysis executable <b>shark.exe.</b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
2) Select the solution module required from either 2D or 3D, and the required articulation type. The default is to open in the 3D module under bump/rebound articulation.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
3) Set the required display units.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
4) Optionally load any required user defined templates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
5) Enter the required suspension data, either from an existing saved file or through the new file options. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm118.bmp" title="bm118.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Program Start-up<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
During program start-up a number of system checks are performed. The users ini file is searched for and if found, loaded to overwrite the internal defaults. User line data bases if referenced are also checked for and added to the relevant menus.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Start-up Errors<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
During program start-up the searching for a subsequent loading of the <u>users </u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">ini</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> file</font></u></font> can in exceptional circumstances, results in an error message. This implies a corrupt ini file possibly due to a previous partial save or inappropriate editing, (the ini file should not be edited by hand).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm119.bmp" title="bm119.bmp"><br>
|
||
Error message ini file read failure<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Selecting okay will continue to start the program, but with only a partial reading of the ini file, (partial up to the point of read error). Partial reading of the ini file may cause problems which may require the program to be closed and restarted. If the problems persists, (as it may, since the invalid settings will be written back into ini file when the program has a normal exit), the only option may be to delete the ini file, see <u>Defaults</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Whilst strictly not a start-up error, the other possible start-up event that may occur is the detection of a previous runs temporary scratch file. This is interpreted as a previous run incorrectly shutting down, as these temporary scratch files used for the undo feature, are deleted on normal program exit.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
If a scratch file(s) is identified, the user is given the option of recovering the most recent file and thus avoids potential data loss.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm120.bmp" title="bm120.bmp"><br>
|
||
Data Recovery Message<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphics Frame Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The interfaces main <u>graphics</u></font> display has two alternative drivers. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (<i>View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),</i> which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles <i>View / Fill Style / Hidden Line </i>and <i>View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )</i> do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (<i>View / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL</i>), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Window Descriptions<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The application window layout utilizes a Multi Document interface (MDI) style. Where display and graph windows are displayed as children of the main window. The main window has a top menu bar and four toolbars which have optional positions. The graphical display is drawn in a 3D viewing window, whilst individual <u>graphs</u></font> have separate windows.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm5.bmp" title="bm5.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example screen shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Overall appearance of application<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Module Type<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
On program start-up by default the application will go into the 3D module, and in bump/rebound articulation mode. Since the 2D and 3D module data sets are completely separate, change to the required module before starting data entry.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm121.bmp" title="bm121.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the application module <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Toolbar Icons<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The menu entry <i>Module / Shark </i>sub menu can be used to select the required module and articulation type.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm122.bmp" title="bm122.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the application module <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> pull-down menu options<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Note that it is possible for the application to detect that a data file being loaded is a 2D or 3D data file and if necessary it will switch to the appropriate module.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Data Entry<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
At start-up the main form of data entry to the program is the suspension hard points coordinates, (irrespective of module). To load an existing data file use the <i>File / Open...</i></font> menu item, (note that the five most recently opened files are appended to the <i>File</i> menu). To create a new model select the <i>File / New</i> menu item set the required suspension end(s) to model and the required <u>suspension type</u>. All new models created in this way will be fully populated with default values, not only for the suspension hard points but also all other data requirements, (i.e. tyre sizes).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm123.bmp" title="bm123.bmp"><br>
|
||
Creating a new model<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
These default values can now be edited whilst still within the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">new model</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dialogue box by selecting the relevant icon. Alternatively the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Done</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option can be selected to view the new model and the main </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Edit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> functions used to revise the data.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm124.bmp" title="bm124.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the default co-ordinates data<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
It is possible to have an asymmetric model. If this is required then the check box at the top of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">new model</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> dialogue should be un-selected. <br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Getting Started </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Exiting the Program<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The close the program select the <i>File / Exit</i></font> menu item, and then confirm the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">okay to exit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> prompt. Alternative methods to close the application include the conventional </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">X</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> from the windows top right corner, Alt+F4 or close from the main windows top left menu. In addition the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">esc</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> key will close the application, (subject to accepting the prompt).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm125.bmp" title="bm125.bmp"><br>
|
||
Okay to exit prompt<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - File<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / New:</font></font> Creates a new model. Opens the new model dialogue box to create a new suspension model. This is also the route to adding a new front or rear suspension to the current model file, i.e. convert a single axle model into a full vehicle model.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Open:</font> Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load. Note that file open will lose the current model data. The file reader is able to identify the difference between a 2D and 3D data file and will if necessary change module.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Add End from File:</font> Opens the standard Windows file browser to locate the required existing file to load the suspension end from. This 3D only option allows the user to add to a single end model the other suspension end from an existing saved file. Only the suspension geometry and compliance properties are loaded from this second file. You cannot use this option if you already have both ends defined. If you have a full vehicle model and want to switch one end to a saved model you must first remove one the required end by using the File / New menu and un-checking the relevant selection box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Import Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:</font> Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Import Hard Points from / User </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">A</font></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Format:</font></font></font> Opens a split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an User specific model file and extract the hard point geometry directly from it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the identified Sub System sections to be viewed and the hard point values found.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Export Hard Points from / Adams Sub System:</font> The reverse of the previous Adams menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load an Adams Sub System model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Export Hard Points from / User </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">A</font></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Format:</font></font></font> The reverse of the previous User A format menu item. Opens the same split screen text editor window that allows the user to load a User specific format model file and populate it with the current hard point geometry directly to it via text recognition strings defined in the template. A preview feature allows the modified Sub System to be viewed prior to applying the extraction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Save As:</font> Opens the standard Windows file browser to enable the current model to be saved to disc. Browse to the required folder and enter/select the required file name.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Run Virtual Compliance Test:</font> This option provides a data link between the two modules of Lotus Suspension Analysis. The full vehicle handling module requires a number of splines that define the motion of the un-sprung corner masses under a variety of loading and displacement conditions. This data would conventionally come from physical testing of a vehicle on a SKCMS rig. This option allows you to take a Shark full vehicle compliant model and run it through a series of <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">virtual</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tests to produce these splines. This option is only available for models with both front and rear suspensions defined. To produce valid results any anti roll bars and the compliant steering rack option should be included in your model. Whilst this option will still run if these are not added the opposed and parallel tests will not correctly identify the cross car force linking if not added.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Re-Read Default Templates (skip user):</font> This menu option will remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. The user templates file is not loaded even if it exists.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Re-Read Default+User Templates:</font> This menu option remove all currently defined templates and revert back to the hard coded default template definitions. It will then search for and if found re-read the data file that contains the user defined additional 3d kinematic template information. It is defined as additional since the original hard coded templates are always available, (unless overwritten by the external defaults file or a user loaded set).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Add Custom Templates:</font> This option allows a user to read a separate templates file. This file can either add to or overwrite the currently defined templates. This potential to overwrite includes both the hard coded defaults and any loaded from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">users</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> file. Templates are identified by a position index, thus if you load a template as index 4 it will replace the hard coded default template.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Save Custom Templates (All):</font></font></font> This option allows the user to save the complete current template set to an external data file. This data file will then contain the current settings for the hard coded templates any added from the defaults file and any loaded from a custom templates file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Edit Templates:</font> Opens a multi-panel spread sheet display that allows the user to edit and create templates. The user can view the settings of the existing templates, (including hard coded templates) and use the existing templates as a start point for a new template.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / File Text Edit&:</font> Opens the Data file text editor. This dialogue box can be used to view and edit data files in a purely textual environment. This is an advanced user feature only that is primarily intended for debugging use and is not recommended as a normal working practice. This is primarily because the data file format is not formally declared. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">File / Exit:</font> Closes the application, subject to confirmation of <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">okay to exit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Appended to the bottom of the <font color="#0000ff">File</font></font></font> menu, is a list of the last five (max) opened files.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Module<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / 2D Bump:</font></font> Changes to the 2D module in Bump articulation mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / 2D Roll:</font> Changes to the 2D module in Roll articulation mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / 3D Bump:</font> Changes to the 3D module in Bump articulation mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / 3D Roll:</font> Changes to the 3D module in Roll articulation mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / 3D Steer:</font> Changes to the 3D module in Steer articulation mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Shark / Combined Motion:</font> Changes to the combined Bump and Steer articulation mode. This allows a user defined combination of bump travel with steering lock to be specified for analyzing items such as ball joint travel and wheel envelope<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Module / Raven / STD Interface:</font> Changes to the Raven module. This will only be available if you are licensed for this full vehicle-handling module, (licensed separately from Shark).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Data<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Model Properties:</font></font> Edit model properties via the tree structure display window. Expand required sections to locate individual data fields. Select required data field and edit displayed value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / View / Edit Coordinates 2D:</font> Displays 2D model coordinates for viewing and editing in a simple single column spread-sheet, (only available in 2D module).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / View / Edit Coordinates Front:</font> Displays 3D model front coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a front axle included).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / View / Edit Coordinates Rear:</font> Displays 3D model rear coordinates for viewing and editing in a multi column spread-sheet, (only available in a 3D module with a rear axle included).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Parameters:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Parameters</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data set for viewing and editing. This data set includes the values controlling the articulation limits, overall vehicle properties such as wheelbase, C of G height, brake split, drive split and brake type.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Raven Conv. Parameters:</font></font></font> Lists the static values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These single values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Raven Corner Parameters:</font> Lists the corner values used when populating the virtual SKCMS data file. These corner values are not calculated as part of the test nor are they part of the Shark data file, hence these editable default values are used.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Body Type:</font> Defines the body graphics used in the 3D display. Options currently limited to the internal options or none. Envisaged expanding to include user defined body sets. Current options include, none, Saloon, Open sports, Old Single Seater, Single Seater, Utility, Super Saloon, Minivan and user defined. Select the required option. Visibility controlled by separate visibility switch.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Edit User Body Data:</font> For the user defined body option this menu is enabled to allow direct editing of the lines and facets used to define the body. This allows existing default types to be modified and/or import of STL files to represent the body.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Tyre Sizes:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Tyres</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data set for viewing and editing. In kinematic mode this lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results. When in compliant solver mode two additional values are listed, these being the tyre vertical stiffness settings.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Steering Type:</font> For front suspensions this defines if the steering mechanism is a rack or a steering box. A steering box system requires additional hard points to be defined. When first changing a model from rack to steering box, the application will prompt for the coordinates of the steering box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Edit Box Coords:</font> Only enabled when steering type is set to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">steering box</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. This displays the current steering box hard points coordinates in a simple spread-sheet display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Titles:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Titles</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data set for viewing and editing. The titles have no visual impact within the interface merely act as text labels within the data file. Little used feature of limited use included for backwards compatibility.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (All):</font></font></font> Opens the <u>Bush data</u> display section. All joints can be edited from this display both in terms of their kinematic coordinates and their compliant properties. The compliant bush properties include the definition of the bush<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s local coordinate system as well as the bush stiffness properties.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Bush Properties (Stiffness):</font> Opens the <u>bush stiffness</u> display window. It consists of a series of sliders that allows the selected bushes individual stiffness properties to be changed via sliders updating both the calculations and the displayed images simultaneously.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Spring</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data set for viewing and editing. The spring properties control the spring force applied to the compliant model through defining the free length, fitted length and linear rate. Note that the visual appearance of the spring is set under the <font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Sizes<font color="#000000"> section.<br>
|
||
</font></font></font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Damper</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data values for viewing and editing. This lists the Damper rate used for the front and rear dampers. Note that damper1 would be that normally used for the single damper in a corner model. Damper2 would be that used either for a second damper in a corner model or the damper for the second corner in a full axle model. Note that Individual damper properties can be altered by selecting them via the 3d view whilst in edit mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm126.bmp" title="bm126.bmp"><br>
|
||
Damper Properties<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Tyre Properties:</font> Lists the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Tyres</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> data set for viewing and editing. This lists the rolling radius for the front and rear axles, together with the width. The tyre width value is purely for graphical visualization, it does not alter the analysis results, also given is the tyre vertical stiffness values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / External Forces:</font></font></font> Opens the <u>external force</u> display window. This enables all external force data sets to be edited. Properties include magnitude, part attachment, orientation by <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">head</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tail</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> definition and each force/sets on/off setting.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties:</font> Lists the roll bar properties for front and rear suspensions, used in the compliant model if a roll bar has been included. Properties are for the roll bar rate in terms of N.mm/Rad.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Compliance Data / General Data:</font> Displays the values used for default stiffnesses. The first is the singularity stiffness required by the solver for parts such as tie rods that mathematically have a degree of freedom, and secondly the stiffness used for <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">rigid</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> ball joint. Mathematically the ball joints are not treated as rigid but bushes with very high stiffness in all three translation directions.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Mass Data / C of G Properties:</font> Displays the defined Mass properties of the current model. The mass properties specify the C of G values for each part in terms of magnitude, position and orientation. Its layout/requirements are similar to those used for the definition of bush stiffnesses. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Coordinates / Save:</font> Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved coordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Coordinates / Recall Saved:</font> Recalls a saved hard point sets, replacing the current values with those in the temporary store. Saved sets identified by their label.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Coordinates / Delete Saved:</font> Deletes a saved hard points set from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Coordinates / Delete All:</font> Deletes all saved hard point sets from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Set Static Angles&:</font> Opens a simple data entry window that allows the user to set the static camber and toe angles directly. By defining the angles the stub axle points position is modified to obtain the required angles. The co-ordinates of the wheel centre are left unaltered.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Set/Edit Combined Motion Profile&:</font> Opens a dialogue window for the display and editing of the combined bump/rebound and steering envelope. This profile is used for identifying limits of ball joint articulations and future uses will include wheel envelopes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Use Extended Bump Travel:</font> Enables the extended bump/rebound travel option. If unchecked the program solves at even increments of bump travel as specified by the increment value within the defined limits. When checked the solver runs through a specific prescribed list of bump positions. Note that -ve is rebound +ve is bump. The individual values are set through the following menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel&:</font> Opens a data list dialogue box to display/edit the extended bump travel data. These values are only used when the above option is checked. Each bump position can be given a label. This label is used within graph x-y listing for recognition by appearing on the status bar when 'hovering' over a plotted point.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Edit<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Undo (Ctrl+Z):</font></font> <u>Edit undo</u> provides a function that after a number of changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to step back through the changes undoing them step by step. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes <b>Ctrl+Z</b>. If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to undo.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Redo (Ctrl+Y):</font> provides a function that after a number of undo changes to the suspension hard points coordinates, it is possible to reapply the the changes that have been undone. This menu can be used or often more conveniently by using the equivalent short cut key strokes <b>Ctrl+Y</b>. If this menu is not available then no edit events are left in the buffer to redo.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Modify Mode:</font> Sets the <u>data edit</u> mode as either Edit, Joggle or Drag. More normal to use equivalent convenience <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">File</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> toolbar icons.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Change Mode:</font></font></font> Sets the <u>change mode</u> as either <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Change Part Lengths</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Retain Part Lengths</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. The default </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">change</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode is to change the lengths and relationships between points on a part as a hard point is modified. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Retain Part Lengths</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option restricts the pick-able points to just those that are connected to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ground</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> but retains the defined part lengths as a point is modified.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / All Settings (Ctrl+S):</font> Opens a single display window that allows a single point of access to a large number of the graphical, graph and setup settings. This consolidated display supplements the existing individual menu structure to provide quicker overall control of the display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Abs Position&:</font> Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. A new point is added to the template and attached to the ground. The user is then presented with the current properties for editing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Rel to Point Pos</font> Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Ground, Between Points</font> Adds a new point to the current template. If both front and rear ends are in the model and displayed the user is prompted to identify to which end the point should be added. Only the points associated with the ground are made visible for suitable selection. The user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Part, Abs Position&:</font> Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once selected a point is added at the user defined absolute position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Part, Rel to Point Pos&:</font> Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select a point on the part relative to which the new point is defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Point / to Part, Between Points&:</font> Adds a new point to the selected part. On selection of this menu the Part labels and notional centres are made visible for suitable selection. Once a part has been selected only this part is made visible and the user must select two points on the part between which is added the new point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Spring 1:</font> Provides an interactive <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">picking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and <i>Add Point / to Ground</i></font></font> menu options to do this if they don<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Add</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Spring 2:</font> Provides an interactive <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">picking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> method of adding a spring to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two spring end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and <i>Add Point / to Ground</i></font></font> menu options to do this if they don<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Add</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Spring 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Damper 1:</font> Provides an interactive <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">picking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and <i>Add Point / to Ground</i></font></font> menu options to do this if they don<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Add</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 1 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Damper 2:</font> Provides an interactive <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">picking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> method of adding a damper to the current model. It requires the user to pick the two damper end points, the order being the end attached to the body followed by the end attached to the suspension. Thus it requires the required point positions to already exist in the model, (use Add Point / to Part and <i>Add Point / to Ground</i></font></font> menu options to do this if they don<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t already exist). This can also be performed by directly editing the template via the template editor. This </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Add</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> changes not only the model but also the underlying template. Thus if the change is to be retained the template must also be saved. Note that if the Damper 2 already exists in the current template you cannot add it again. You must delete it first or change the point association via the template editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Abs Pos:</font> Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. The user then specifies its actual location in absolute global co-ordinates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Rel to Point Pos:</font> Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick a point on this part and specify its location relative to the selected point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs / to Part, Between Points:</font> Provides an interactive means by which a parts C of G may be added to the model, (this can also be done directly through the template editor). The user must identify which part the C of G point is to be applied to by picking from the now visible part labels. To define its location the user must then pick two points on this part the C of G is then positioned midway between these selected points.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Convert Corner to Axle Model:</font> In some instances even for an independent suspension it is required to model a complete axle rather than a corner model. This may be because it is required to include a compliant rack, anti roll-bar, sub-frame or any connecting part. This can either be done by hand through the template editor or by using this convenience function. This single click operation will review the current template and then add the necessary parts, point, connections and graphics to produce a full axle template. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Two Part Rack to Model:</font> This function provides a simple single click method of adding a two-part compliant rack to the template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs both steering attachment points to have already been defined in the template. This option adds two parts, (the rack cross-link and the rack bush), six new points, (including both connection points and C of G points), four new bushes and associated graphic elements. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit / Add Roll Bar to Model:</font> This function provides a simple method of adding a roll-bar to the current models template. It can only be applied to a full axle model, as it needs to connect to both suspension sides. The type of roll<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">bar it adds uses two points to ground and drop links from the bar ends to the suspension part. Thus the user must pick the attachment part and define a point on this part for the drop link to attach to. You do not pre-define this connecting point but enter its global position as part of the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Add Roll Bar</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> function, (it is automatically mirrored across to the other side). This function adds three new parts, ten new points, seven new bushes and associated graphics. The reason for the odd number of bushes is because the roll bar stiffness is defined through a revolute bush placed such that it joins the two halves of the roll bar. To retain this modified template either save it with the model file or as a user or custom template.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - View<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Refresh:</font></font> Updates all graphical displays, both <u>Graphics</u> and <u>Graphs</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Dynamic Viewing:</font> Menu option to switch between <u>dynamic viewing</u> and <u>edit</u> modes. Either by a toggle action or by specific selection..<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Translate View:</font> Sets the <u>dynamic view</u> mode to translate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Translation by left mouse button hold and move.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Scale View:</font> Sets the <u>dynamic view</u> mode to scale. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Scale by left mouse button hold and drag vertically.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Rotate View:</font> Sets the <u>dynamic view</u> mode to rotate. If currently in edit mode this will also cause a change to the dynamic view mode. Rotation by left mouse button hold and move.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Pick View Centre:</font> Allows the view centre to be picked. The pick is based on the nearest picked hard point. The current view is translated such that picked point becomes the view centre, no change is made to either the scale or orientation of the view. Subsequent view rotations will be about this new <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">object</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> point. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Zoom:</font> Pick the area of the display to zoom to fit current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed view will retain the correct aspect ratio, (i.e. no distortion is allowed), and thus the final displayed region will include additional regions at either the top and bottom or both sides.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Autoscale (Ctrl+A):</font> Resets the graphical view such that all drawn components appear within the display window. Note that this is only applied to the graphics window and not the <u>graphs</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Fill Style:</font> Sets the fill style to be used in the graphics display. Not all the fill style options are supported by every machine. Two <u>graphics frame</u> driver options are used one of which will not correctly support two of the fill styles. The fill styles available are, Wire Frame, Filled, Hidden Line and Depth Buffered (flat shaded). The later two will not work correctly unless the graphics frame type has been set to OpenGL<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Std Views:</font> Three orthogonal views are offered to aid simple planar viewing of the 3D model. The std views are y-z (front view), z-x (side view) and x-y (top view). Equivalent view toolbar icons are also available.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Saved Views / Save&:</font> Saves the current 3D view settings to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved views are lost when the application is closed. Any number of views can be stored.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Saved Views / Recall Saved:</font> Recalls a saved view, replacing the current view with that in the temporary store. Saved views are identified by their labels.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Saved Views / Delete Saved:</font> Deletes a saved view from the temporary store. Only valid use is the simplifying of the displayed options through reduced menu list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Saved Views / Delete All:</font> Deletes all saved views from the temporary store. Quicker than deleting one at a time if looking to start the storing from scratch.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Set Background Colour&:</font> Opens a standard colour selection dialog to pick a new colour for the background colour used in the graphics display. Note that graphs have their ow ncolour settings and are not affected by this change.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Graphics Frame Type:</font> Sets the <u>graphics frame</u> device type as either Windows GDI or Open GL. The default device driver is a Windows GDI, (<i>View / Graphics Frame Type / Windows GDI),</i> which whilst it works with all Hardware options does so at the expense of both speed and capability. The GDI driver is unable to support depth buffered display and hence the view styles <i>View / Fill Style / Hidden Line </i>and <i>View / Fill Style / Depth Buffered (Flat shaded )</i> do not function correctly. The alternative device driver is Open GL, (<i>View / Graphics Frame Type / Open GL</i>), which is both faster and supports depth buffering/hidden line display types.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Not all hardware is able to use the Open GL device type, typical failures are inability to refresh and lack of correct hidden line display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Set Display Mode Tool&:</font> Opens the display mode tool. This provides a single dialogue box that can be used to control all 3d view display modes. The four available display modes are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Articulation Display<br>
|
||
|
||
Deformed Geometry (compliance mode only)<br>
|
||
|
||
Mode Shape (compliance mode only)<br>
|
||
|
||
Forced-Damped (compliance mode only)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Each of the four display modes can be animated.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The articulation display can be set as one of the following;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Full + Half + Static (normal articulation displacement display)<br>
|
||
|
||
Full + Static (normal articulation displacement display)<br>
|
||
|
||
Static Only (normal articulation displacement display)<br>
|
||
|
||
All Steps (normal articulation displacement display)<br>
|
||
Single Step (define which step from current articulation list)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm127.bmp" title="bm127.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>The Display Mode Tool.<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The compliant deformed geometry is shown for a specified articulation position and for a defined scaler. This scaler is applied to the actual compliant displacements to enable small displacements to be visualized.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The compliant Mode Shape display is for a selected mode. The modes are identified by number rather than by frequency, (although the frequency value is shown on the 3d view). A scaler is also applied to modal displays to enable small modal displacements to be visualized.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The Forced-Damped display shown for a specified frequency. A scaler is applied to the amplitudes to enable small displacements to be visualized.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
As an alternative to using the display mode tool, individual menus can be used to set the display mode and associated properties.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Full+Half+Static:</font> Sets the display mode to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Articulation Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and will show the suspension at full travel, mid travel and static. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">travel</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Full+Static:</font> Sets the display mode to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Articulation Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and will show the suspension at full travel and static. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">travel</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Static Only:</font> Sets the display mode to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Articulation Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and will show the suspension at static position only.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / All Steps:</font> Sets the display mode to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Articulation Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and will show the suspension at all calculated travel points. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">travel</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Single Step:</font> Sets the display mode to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Articulation Display</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and will show the suspension at a specified single travel step. The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">travel</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will be bump/rebound, roll or steer as appropriate to the current analysis mode. A number greater than the actual available steps will be clipped to the limiting value.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Deformed Geometry:</font> Sets the display mode to <u></u><font face="Times New Roman"><u> Deformed Geometry</u></font><u> showing the suspensions compliant deformation at a specified single travel step. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all displacements.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial"><font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Mode Shape:</font></font><u> Sets the display mode to </u><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">Mode Shape</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> showing the suspensions modal shape for the static position for the currently specified mode number. The currently specified scaling factor will be applied to all modal displacements.<br>
|
||
</font></u></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Screen Display / Forced-Damped:</font><u> Sets the display mode to </u><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">Forced-Damped</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> showing the suspensions forced response for the static position for the currently specified frequency. The defined scaling factor will be applied to all amplitudes.<br>
|
||
</font></u></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Single Step Display:</font><u> Sets the single step position for the </u><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">Articulation display</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> mode when it is set to single step. This can be a number between 0 and </font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">n</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> where 0 is the static position and </font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">n</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> is some point through the travel. The more intuitive way to set this is through the </font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">Display mode Tool</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> as this gives each single step as a labeled list.<br>
|
||
</font></u></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Deformed Geometry Scalar:</font><u> Defines the scalar used in the deformed geometry animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated compliant displacements, such that the deformations can be viewed on the display.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Deformed Geometry Position:</font><u> Sets the incremental articulation position for which the deformed geometry will be animated at. Zero is the static ride position. A number greater than the actual available steps will be clipped to the limiting value.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Mode Shape, Scalar:</font><u> Defines the scalar used in the </u><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial">Mode Shape</font></u></font><font face="Times New Roman"><u><font face="Arial"> animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated modal displacements, such that the mode shape can be viewed on the display.<br>
|
||
</font></u></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Mode Shape, Mode No.:</font><u> Sets the mode number for display. Mode numbers are used rather than frequency values, although the associated frequency is shown on the 3d view. The lowest frequency is mode No. 1.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Forced-Damped, Scalar&:</font><u> Defines the scalar used in the forced-damped animation and display. Is only applicable for the compliant solver mode. Scalars are used to exaggerate the calculated forced displacements, such that the deformations can be viewed on the display.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Forced-Damped, Frequency&.:</font><u> Sets the frequency value for display. The frequency can be set anywhere between 0 and 1000 Hz. <br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Animate (On/Off):</font><u> Switches on animation</u><u> of the suspension(s) for the currently defined display mode. All standard viewing and editing functions can still be used whilst the animation is on. The actual display mode, position, articulation type etc are controlled through other menu settings, (see above).<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Free Body Diagram:</font><u> Changes the graphical display to just show the points, forces and graphical elements associated with a single part. The selection menu allows the user to pick for the selected corner any available part.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">View / Change Units:</font><u> Opens the utility</u><u> for setting the Angle, Length, Force and Mass display units. Options are given for each as well as an option to have a user defined unit display.<br>
|
||
</u><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Tracking<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / Toggle:</font></font> Not strictly a toggle, but a cycle through the available tracking options. The available tracking options change depending whether the current view is orthogonal or not.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / All:</font> Only applicable if in an orthogonal view. <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">All</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> actually means two axis, i.e. all axes in the current orthogonal view.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / X:</font></font></font> Changes the tracking direction to the x-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the y-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / Y:</font> Changes the tracking direction to the y-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-z orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / Z:</font> Changes the tracking direction to the z-axis. If the selection is not valid, for instance if in the x-y orthogonal view, then this selection is ignored.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / Visible:</font> Sets the visibility of the tracking lines. Note that tracking lines are only visible when in dynamic view mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Tracking / Length:</font> Tracking lines are drawn on the display to a fixed length. The size of this graphical length can be changed from the default value through the opened edit box.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Graphics<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Point Nos:</font></font> Toggles the visibility of the template point numbers on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Point Labels:</font> Toggles the visibility of the template point labels on the graphical display. The size and colour is user definable. All settings are saved to the ini file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Point Limits / Visible:</font> Toggles the visibility of the <u>Limit</u> boxes. If this turns the visibility to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> it will also if necessary set the Use to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, i.e. the limit boxes can only be in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">use</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> if visible. Toggling the visibility to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> does not make them in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">use</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, i.e. limit boxes can be visible but not in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">use</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. The in </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">use</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> setting is controlled by the next menu item.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Point Limits / Use:</font> Toggles the point <u>limit</u> boxes <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">use</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> setting. When in use they limit the joggling or dragging of hard points to within the limited region. Limit boxes are also used for tolerance analysis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Point Values:</font></font></font> Toggles the visibility of the x,y and z coordinates for the suspension hard points. When <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the static coordinates are drawn adjacent to each hard point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Part Nos:</font></font></font> Toggles the visibility of the template part numbers. When <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the template part numbers are drawn at the geometric centre of each part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Part Labels:</font> Toggles the visibility of the template part labels. When <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the template part labels are drawn adjacent to the geometric centre of each part.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Marker:</font></font></font> Toggles the visibility of the part C of G markers. Part C of G<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G markers are drawn as green and black quadrant style images similar to the body C of G marker.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Axes Points:</font> Toggles the visibility of the part C of G axis points. Part C of G<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s can only be drawn when in compliant mode. Part C of G axis points can be picked and dragged as well as edited to re-define the C of G axes. C of G axes are used to orientate local mass properties.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Part C of G Visibility / C of G Local Axes:</font></font></font> Toggles the visibility of the part C of G local axes. These graphic axes show the current local axes as defined by the local axis points. Part mass properties are defined relative to these local axes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Visibility:</font> Controls the visibility of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">enhanced</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off, Toggle all enhanced graphic types, set them all to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or set them all to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. For the purpose of this menu the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Enhanced</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graphics items are, Spring, Damper, Wheel, Bushes, Grid and Body. The other items in this visibility list are not affected by the global </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">enhanced</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> status changes, only they</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">re own individual settings. These are; Triad, Origin Marker, C of G marker, Moving Ground/wheels and Roll axis.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Display Ends:</font> Sets the visibility switch for each suspension end. This enables the display to show both, front only or rear only, in a model that contains two axles. Menu has no relevance to a single axle model.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Display Both Sides:</font> For visualization enables the viewing of both suspension sides on an axle when the template is defined as a single corner. For full axle templates this switch will have no effect. Menu acts as a toggle, so un-check menu to disable viewing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Colours:</font> Provides control over individual plot element colours. Modified colours settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Links, Incremental Links, Static Points, Incremental Points, Picked Points, Static Roll Centre Position, Incremental Roll Centre Position, 2D Axis Lines, 3D Drag Lines, Triad, Static 2D Construction Lines, Incremental 2D Construction Lines, Limit Lines (on), Limit lines (off), Point Values and Point Nos.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Colours / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Colours:</font> Provides control over individual Enhanced plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The elements that can be defined via this menu include; Static Spring, Incremental Spring, Static Damper, Incremental Damper, Static Wheel, Incremental Wheel, Wheel Fill, Static Bushes, Incremental Bushes, Grid, Static Body, Incremental Body and Body Fill.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Colours / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Edit:</font> Displays the Enhanced graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Spring Diameter, No of Spring Coils, Lower Damper Tube Diameter, Upper Damper Tube diameter, Damper No. of Facets, Pivot Diameter, Pivot No. of Facets, Tyre No. of Facets, Tyre Diameter Shoulder ratio, Tyre Width Shoulder Ratio, 3D Tracking Line Length, Joggle Symbol Size, C of G Symbol Size and Ground Plane Grid Size.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Enhanced Sizes / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant enhanced graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Label Sizes / Edit:</font> Displays the current Label sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the user ini file. Sizes that can be changed are the hard point values size and the hard point number size.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Label Sizes / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant label sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Colours:</font> Provides control over individual compliance plot element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The compliance elements that can be defined via this menu include; Ball Joint (Rigid), Bush (Compliant), Tyre Spring, External Force and Calculated Force.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Colours / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element colours back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Edit:</font> Displays the compliance graphics element sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Ball Joint Diameter, Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity, Ball Joint Height Complexity, Bush Radius, Bush Length, Bush Circumferential Complexity, Bush Height Complexity, Bush Axis Length, Tyre Spring Diameter, External Force Head, External Force Fixed Length and External/Internal Force Scaled Length.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Sizes / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant compliance graphics element sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Visibility:</font> Controls the visibility of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">complaint</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graphics items. Options are given to switch individual graphic types on and off. For the purpose of this menu the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Compliant</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graphics items are, Ball Joints, Bushes, Tyre Spring, Bush Axis points, Bush Local Axis, External Forces, External Force Axis, Calculated Forces and Calculated Force Values.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Compliance Visibility / External Force Type:</font> Two types of compliant external force display are available. Either a Fixed length arrow that does not change with its magnitude or a scaled force vector whose magnitude is multiplied by a graphical length scalar.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Copy to Clipboard:</font> Copies the current graphical display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Save to File:</font> Saves the graphics display to a file. Three file formats are supported, bmp, jpg and png.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / AVI File Writer&:</font> Opens the AVI file write dialogue. This provides a set of simple to use methods for creating AVI files. Users can create an AVI based on the currently defined displacement, animating over the defined range. Or creating an animation sequence from a series of individual screen shots. The AVI file can be for the full graphics screen or a selected portion. No compression is currently used so whilst file sizes are larger, the issue over LCD projectors being unable to show due to unsupported compression is avoided.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Pnt Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Vector Line:</font></font></font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required, a line is drawn through the first point who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s direction is set by the vector defined by the second and third picks, points need not be on the same part. The first and second picks can be the same point. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Xvector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global X axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Yvector Line:</font></font></font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Y axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Zvector Line:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required, a line is drawn through the picked point in the global Z axis direction. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-Plane-Norm:</font></font></font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction normal to the selected plane. The plane is identified by three point picks. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Line / Pnt-UserVector:</font> Adds a new Line graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. A line is drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by a user vector. The line is drawn to a global clipped length.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Pivot:</font></font></font> Adds a new Pivot graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Tube:</font></font></font> Adds a new Tube graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two hard point picks are required, both points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Cylinder / Vector-Radius-Length:</font> Adds a new cylinder graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Drawn through the selected point in a direction defined by the second and third point picks. The radius and length of the cylinder are defined directly.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Circle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:</font></font></font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required through which is drawn a circle, both the circle centre and radius are calculated and displayed as part of the graphical display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Circle / Cntr-Rad-Norm:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point of a defined radius and who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s normal is defined by the second and third picks. The first and second picks can be the same point.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Circle / Cntr-Pnt-Plane:</font></font></font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn centered at the first point and is drawn through the second point, (i.e. defines the radius), in a plane that contains the third picked point. All picked points must be different.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Circle / Pnt-Normal:</font> Adds a new Circle graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required. The circle is drawn through the first point about the defined normal vector. All picked points must be different. The derived circle centre and radius is drawn as part of the graphical element display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Radius:</font></font></font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the first pick and the radius is set by the second pick.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt Radius:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. One hard point pick is required. The sphere is centered at the pick and given the radius specified by the user.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt Dia:</font></font></font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Two unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is centered at the mid point of the two picks, the radius being half the distance between them.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Sphere / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt:</font> Adds a new Sphere graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Four unique hard point picks are required. The sphere is drawn through the selected four points. Four points will define a unique sphere who</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s calculated radius and centre position is identified as part of the drawn graphical element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:</font></font></font> Adds a new Triangular Facet graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Facet / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Facet:</font> Adds a new Four noded Facet graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Four unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. Whilst points need not be in a plane, any facet drawn of non-planar nodes is not fully defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Plane:</font></font></font> Adds a plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Three unique hard point picks are required, points need not be on the same part. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-X-Y Plane:</font> Adds an X-Y plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-X-Z Plane:</font></font></font> Adds an X-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-Y-Z Plane:</font> Adds an Y-Z plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Plane / Pnt-UserVector Plane:</font></font></font> Adds an plane graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template drawn through the selected pick. The orientation of the plane is controlled by two user defined vectors. All plane elements are drawn clipped to a global value, (which the user can edit).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Pnt Dist:</font> Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the total distance between the two points.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Line Dist:</font></font></font> Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the total perpendicular distance between the point and the line.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Distance / Line-Line Dist:</font> Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines as a total distance.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Distance / Pnt-Plane Dist:</font></font></font> Adds a points<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane as a total distance.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Pnt Comps:</font> Adds a point to point distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any two hard point picks are required, both points must be on the same suspension corner. The display shows the distance between the two points in its x, y and z components. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Line Comps:</font></font></font> Adds a point to line distance graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The last two picks define the required line. The display shows the perpendicular distance between the point and the line in its x, y and z components. <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Components / Line-Line Comps:</font> Adds a minimum distance between two lines graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first two picks define one line whilst the last two picks define the other required line. The display shows the minimum normal distance between the two lines in its x, y and z components.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Components / Pnt-Plane Comps:</font></font></font> Adds a points<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> distance from a plane as a graphical element to the selected ends</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any four hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The first point is the required point whilst the last three picks define the required plane. The display shows the normal distance between the point and the plane in its x, y and z components.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphics / Add / Angle / Pnt-Pnt-Pnt Angle:</font> Adds an angle between three points graphical element to the selected ends<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> template. Any three hard point picks are required, all points must be on the same suspension corner. The middle picks is the point for which the angle is given. The display shows the angle created by the three point picks in degrees. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Graphs<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / New/Open:</font></font> Opens a new <u>graph</u> window. Each new graph will by default take the use y-variable from the available list. To change the y-variable once opened use the mouse right button menu options.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Visibility:</font> Controls the visibility of the graph items. Options are given to switch individual graph items on and off. For the purpose of this menu the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">graph</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> items are; Grid Lines, Deviation Values, Point Symbols, Data Values, Derivative Values, Scope Line, User Line and the Fit Line.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Colours:</font> Provides control over individual graph element colours. Modified colour settings are stored to the users ini file. The graph elements that can be defined via this menu include; Grid Lines, Background, Axis Lines and Text, Border Region, Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Line Marker:</font> Provides control over individual graph line markers. Modified marker settings are saved to the users ini file. The graph lines that marker types can be defined for are; Data Line 2D/3D Front, Data Line 3D Rear, Scope Line 2D/3D Front, Scope Line 3D Rear and User Line. The nine marker types available are Filled Diamond, Triangle, Inverted Triangle, Plus, Cross, Square, Diamond, Circle and Star.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Line Marker / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant graph line marker symbols back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Switch x-y Axis:</font> Changes the visual appearance of the graphs. Swaps the x and y axes around from the normal, such that the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">y-variable</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is plotted along the horizontal axis rather than the default vertical position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Autoscale (All):</font></font></font> Autoscales all open graphs for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines. To autoscale individual graphs use the mouse right button menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Autoscale to Y Increment (All):</font> Autoscales all open graphs y-axes. Includes all visible lines. The autoscaling is based on rounding to the nearest whole number of a specific increment. Each graph variable has its own editable increment setting. This autoscale option can also be applied to individual graphs through the right mouse menu of the specific graph.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / On:</font> Controls the visibility of the scope line display. It is also controllable via the visibility settings above.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Store / Exclusive:</font> Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results, (includes all variables not just those that are currently displayed). These scope lines are then <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">fixed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> for comparative on-graph display, (check relevant visibility switch set to </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">). The </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Exclusive</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option implies that the results are copied into Scope position 1, and the four other scope positions (2 to 5) are emptied.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font><font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Store / Shuffle:</font> Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position 1. All other existing scope data is shuffled down one slot such that one is copied into two etc and any information in position 5 is lost.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Store / Position n:</font> Takes a copy of the current suspension graph results and saves it to scope position n. This will replace any data already stored in this scopes position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Clear / All:</font> Clears the current scope data from all scope positions 1 to 5. Their isno need to clear the scope before capturing a new set, as Scope Line Store will overwrite any current scope values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Clear / Position n:</font> Clears the current scope data from the selected position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / List Deviation From / Position n:</font> Identifies which scope position should be used to determine the deviation value between the data and scope lines.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Scope / Scope Position Symbol:</font> Sets the visibility of either the scope line symbol or when selected displays a number (1 to 5) rather than the symbol.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Copy Front/2D Data to User:</font> Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Copy Rear Data to User:</font> Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear result lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Copy Front/2D Scope to User from / Position n:</font> Convenience function copies the existing 2D or 3D Front scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:</font> Convenience function copies the existing 3D Rear scope lines to the Users Lines, (all variables are copied over not just the visible ones). You will need to identify which scope position to use from 1 to 5.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Clear Current User Store:</font> Clears all user defined line data, (all variables are removed not just those currently visible on open graphs)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Create New DataSet&:</font> Multiple <u>user line</u> sets can be managed through the use of User Line data sets. This menu item creates a new data set. Browse for the required folder location and define file name, default extension .dbs. On creation no user line sets are added to the new dataset.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Include DataSet&:</font> Adds an existing <u>user line</u> dataset to the search list. The search list is stored to the users ini file. The search list provides direct access to any stored user line sets that have been added to these DataSets.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Remove DataSet:</font> removes the selected <u>user line</u> data set from the search list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Load From:</font> Provides a list of found <u>user line</u> sets that can be loaded from the data sets. The loaded user line data will replace any current values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Add Current to:</font> Option to save the current <u>user line</u> data to one of the current datasets on the search list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Manage User Lines / Delete From:</font> Option to remove a stored <u>user line</u> set from one of the current datasets on the search list. User line sets a re identified by the dataset label and line set label.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Marker/Text Sizes / Edit Sizes:</font> Displays the <u>graph</u> marker and text sizes for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; Data Line Marker Size, Scope Line Marker Size, User Line Marker Size, Graph Data Values Text Size, Compliance Title Text Size, Compliance Label Text Size and Compliance Values Text Size.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Marker/Text Sizes / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant graph marker and text sizes back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Edit Settings:</font> Displays the graph decimal points display for viewing and editing. Changes are stored to the users ini file. Properties that can be edited include; X-Data Listing, Y-Data Listing, Derivative Data Listing, Scope Deviation, User Deviation, X-Axis Label, Y-Axis Label and Compliance Graph Values.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Graphs / Decimal Points Display / Set to Defaults:</font> Single menu selection to set all relevant graph decimal points displays back to the default settings. For relevant elements see previous menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Solve<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Motion:</font></font> Sets the ground plane solution type as either moving ground plane or moving body. It is only applicable to the bump articulation type.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / 2D Fix Option:</font> For the <u>2D module</u> a number of alternative solution techniques can be employed. This sets which hard point, if any, is <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">freed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> off to match the target characteristics.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / 3D Compliance:</font></font></font> Turns on the <u>compliant</u> solver. Compliant solutions add elastic bushes and external force effects on to the incremental kinematic solution.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / External Forces:</font> For compliance analysis, external forces can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option or use the equivalent toolbar icon.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Suspension Spring Force:</font> For compliance analysis, the suspension spring force can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Suspension Roll Bar Force:</font> For compliance analysis, the suspension roll bar force (if modeled) can be optionally included. Toggles through on/off with this menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Rack Cross-Link Force:</font> For compliance analysis, the force at the rack track rod ends can optionally be fed across from one suspension corner (if modeled). Toggles through on/off with this menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Bush Rotation Pre-loads:</font> For compliance analysis, the implied pre-loads of the bush due to the incremental kinematic rotation will be included when this option is enabled at each calculated step. By definition at static ride when there is no displacement the pre-loads will be zero.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Convert 2D to 3D:</font> Convenience routine to <u>convert</u> existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Point Tolerance Analysis:</font> Performs a <u>Tolerance analysis</u> for the specified point. Open graphs indicate the range of displayed variable due to the limit box size.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Tolerance Point:</font> Set the suspension hard point to be used for any subsequent <u>Tolerance analysis</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Edit Point Tolerances:</font> Lists the model hard points in a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">tree</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> type view environment, to locate the required point and view/edit its current limit box settings. Limit box settings define the allowable +/- distances along each axis from the defined position.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set All Point Tolerances to&:</font> View/Edit routine to set all suspension hard points to the same values in one go.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Roll Solution Type:</font> Primarily for backwards compatibility with earlier versions, two roll center methods are available. The default (New) method, incrementally rolls the body about the original roll center position. The <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Old</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> method used the previous steps calculated position as the roll point. The old method could lead to large amounts of </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">jacking</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and so was revised to the new method.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Wheelbase Diff Sol:</font> Controls how a difference in the wheelbase is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the wheelbase parameter and the distance between the two axle wheel centers, this option will determine whether the wheelbase parameter is adjusted, or the rear suspension is moved to match the wheelbase parameter.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Grnd Plane Diff Sol:</font> Controls how a difference in the ground plane position is handled when adding a second axle to an existing model. If a difference is found between the two ground plane values, this option will determine whether the difference is accommodated by translation, roll or bump/rebound corrections.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Solver Tolerances:</font> Displays the current solution tolerances for viewing and editing. Solution tolerances listed include The kinematic solution tolerance, Bump small perturbation size and Steer small perturbation size.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Point Coincidence:</font> Enables <u>Point Coincidence</u> checking. With Point Coincidence on, editing hard points checks for more than one hard point within the pick tolerance and presents a list for selection, including <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">All points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Selecting all points creates an equivalent temporary group during any subsequent change.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Report Errors:</font> Switches error-reporting on/off. With recent changes to the solver unlikely to produce any errors reports for the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Ride Height - Bump:</font></font></font> A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by simple change in the bump height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Ride Height </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Bump + Pitch:</font></font></font> A utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height by a combination of bump height change and pitch angle. The values required are the deltas from the current position. A positive bump value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height and a positive pitch angle rotates towards the rear. For a full vehicle model the pitch rotation is about the front wheel center axis. For a single end model the pitch is rotation about the modeled suspension end.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Ride Height </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Adjust Springs:</font></font></font> A utility function that will reset the vehicle spring fitted lengths such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results in no change in ride height, just changes to the relevant spring fitted length(s). The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Ride Height </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Match to Springs:</font></font></font> A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height such that the spring forces balance the defined unsprung weight split. This results a both bump and pitch changes in ride position, (only pitch if full vehicle model). The relevant spring fitted length(s) are also changed. The user must provide values for the unsprung mass and the percentage of the unsprung weight on the front axle. This allows the user to have spring properties dictate the ride height position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Solve / Set Ride Height </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial"> Match to Weight Change:</font></font></font> A utility function that will reset the vehicle ride height based on a change in vehicle unsprung weights. It is not assumed that the initial vehicle ride position balances the current spring settings, (this can be checked/set first using one of the two options above), but effects the change in ride position based purely on the difference between the two defined weight conditions.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Results<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List SDF File&:</font></font> Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List SDF Spline Fits&:</font> Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Fits display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of the spline fit equations for the selected suspension characteristics for all selected articulation types. The spline fit types include Linear, quadratic and cubic. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List SDF Spline Data&:</font> Opens the Suspension Derivative Spline Data display. This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and listings of each splines data points. The user can control which splines are listed as well as inclusion of header information and data echo.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List Bush Deflections&:</font> Opens the scrollable text listing of bush deflections for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List Joint/Bush Rotations&:</font> Opens the scrollable text listing of bush rotations for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List Bush Forces&:</font> Opens the scrollable text listing of bush forces for compliant models under the current zero set load conditions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List All Point Coords for User Position&:</font> Option to list suspension hard points at a user defined bump plus steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) and steer value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List a Point Coords at All Positions&:</font> Option to list the co-ordinates of a single selected suspension hard point at a all current solution positions. User selects the required corner and point. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / List All Point Coords at a Positions&:</font> This is the inverse of the previous option. It lists the co-ordinates of all points for a single selected position. The position is one from the current solver settings rather than a separately user defined position. User selects the required corner and position. The resultant textual display has full support for printing, saving and exporting.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / Display Compliance Values:</font> Toggles the visibility of the Compliance coefficients display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / Ball Joint Rotations:</font> Toggles the visibility of the Ball Joint rotations display. This option is only available in compliant mode. The results show the rotations of a selected joint over the prescribed travel. These rotations can be relative to local or global axes or to a pair of user defined points that identify the housing and ball axes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / Display Kinematic Sum/Optimizer:</font> Toggles the visibility of the display that not only lists the cumulative sum of all weighted deviations but also controls the sensitivity and optimization functions. These optimization settings include individual curve weightings, parameters required and range of interest. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / Modal Analysis Display..:</font> Opens the Modal Analysis bar chart display. The display shows the frequency of each mode by the height of its bar. This option is only available in compliant mode. This display can be used to change the mode displayed in the 3d view, (the current mode is shown filled in <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">cyan</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">), by selecting the required modes bar with the left mouse button. This graph can be left open and is updated </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">live</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> as the model is changed.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Results / Forced-Damped Speed Sweep Display..:</font> Opens the Forced-Damped Results graph. This shows the displacement and rotation of each parts C of G at the specified frequency. The currently displayed frequency point in the 3d view is show on the graph by the vertical line. The currently displayed 3d view frequency can be changed by selecting the required point on the graph using the left mouse button. Whilst this graph display can be left open whilst you continue to edit the model it does not update in a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">live</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> manner due to the associated computational overheads. To update this display select from its right mouse menu list <i>Refresh Plot</i></font></font>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - SetUp<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Icons:</font></font> Provides an option for two styles of icons. Select from either <font color="#0000ff">Standard</font> or <font color="#0000ff">Mouse Sensitive</font>. Standard icons have permanently visible boundaries to the icon, whilst mouse sensitive icons <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">raise</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> as the mouse passes over them. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on next program start-up.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Start Options / Toolbar Position:</font></font></font> Sets the default starting position for the toolbars. All visible toolbars will be placed in this position when the application starts up. Once started the user can choose to change the toolbar positions individually as required. The four available positions are Top, Bottom, Left or Right. This change is stored to the ini file and will only be implemented on the next program start-up.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Start Options / Maximised:</font> If checked defines that the application will start up with the main window maximised, (i.e. expanded to fill the current screen size). Note that if the application is maximised during use, then this will also set the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">maximised</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> setting. This change is stored to the ini file and will be implemented on next program start-up.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Exception Handler On:</font></font></font> Provides a software trapping routine to handle application exception failures. Whilst this won<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t enable the user to recover the current session it will prevent the exception causing a complete system failure. Not normally required this release.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Visual Graphics Cursor:</font> When enabled changes the appearance of the cursor on the main graphical display to indicate the difference between the various modes of dynamic view and on-screen editing. This setting is saved to the users ini file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Save Def. Window Settings:</font> When set this options will save to the users ini file the current size, positions and settings of the graphics and graph windows, such that on a subsequent program start-up all windows will be re-created in the same position/size as previously. They are referred to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> since users can store different settings to alternative files.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Save Window Settings to&:</font> This option allows the user to save the current window and graph settings to a file. These settings can then be retrieved at a later stage or in future runs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Load Window Settings from&:</font> This option allows the user to retrieve from a previously saved file the settings for the main window and graphs. These settings included not only position and size but also displayed variables and axis settings.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Edit Window Offsets&:</font> This option allows the user to specify the values used to determine the position of each window within the MDI interface. These may need to be changed by the user if you find yourself repeatedly having to re-position graph windows despite having used the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">save window settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Include User Graphics In Data Files:</font> With the ability for users to quickly add their own graphical elements to the current template the option is given for users to include them with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Include User Templates In Data Files:</font> With the ability for users to quickly modify the template by point addition etc. the option is given for users to include the template with the data file. This provides a complete way of retaining data that is associated with the model.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Include Optimizer Settings in Data Files:</font> When checked provides data retention/continuity by including the optimizer settings as a sub-section of the model data file. Other wise these data settings could be lost through subsequent use.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / File Toolbar Visibility:</font> Sets the visibility option for the <font color="#0000ff">File</font> toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / View Toolbar Visibility:</font> Sets the visibility option for the <font color="#0000ff">View</font> toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Graphics Toolbar Visibility:</font> Sets the visibility option for the <font color="#0000ff">Graphics</font> toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Graph + Data Toolbar Visibility:</font> Sets the visibility option for the <font color="#0000ff">Graph and Data</font> toolbar. This setting is saved to the ini file and will thus be applied to future runs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Gen Defaults:</font> Opens the general defaults data set for viewing and editing. They primarily deal with settings for the <u>graphics</u> display. They include upper and lower limits to the scaling, the tolerance for point picking, the tolerance for <u>point coincidence</u>, the <u>joggle</u> coarse step size and the <u>animation</u> refresh time step.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Current:</font> Makes a previously created points <u>group</u> the current group. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list. Groups limit edit functions to just hard points that are members of the group. Edited points then move as a group, i.e. same translation applied to all.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Cancel:</font> Cancels the current <u>group</u> selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Delete:</font> Deletes the selected <u>group</u>. This does not delete any points from the model, (as you can<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t do this at any level other than template editing), merely removes the group association. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Create&:</font> Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Pick Temporary&:</font> Creates an new temporary points group . The points are added to this group by selecting a displayed screen region. All visible points within the region being added to it. Unlike the conventional groups this does not need to have a label nor does it need to be <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">made current</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, once the points have been picked it will automatically be set to current. Temporary groups are not saved and when made non-current using the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">delete</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> option they are lost and would need to be re-created.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Groups / Edit:</font> Provides an editing option to existing point groups. The points in the group can be changed, added to or removed from. Groups are identified by their unique label from the menu list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">SetUp / Undo Buffer Length:</font> Sets the length of the <u>undo</u> buffer. The greater the number the more undo steps that will be stored. Setting this value to zero will disable the undo function.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Window<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Tile Horizontal:</font></font> Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily horizontal layout.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Tile Vertical (Picked Order):</font> Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is the order that they have been selected, on start-up this would be the inverse of the order that they were created in.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Tile Vertical (Created Order):</font> Automatic window positioning option that lays open windows in to a primarily vertical layout. The order that they are arranged in is based on the creation order with the graphics display first and then graphs 1 to n.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Cascade:</font> Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / View Custom Control Display:</font> Pick from list to open a previously defined custom control display. Custom controls are added to this list as they are created by the user using the following menu option. When permanently deleted using the WinDelete option, they are removed from this list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Open New Custom Control Display:</font> Creates a new custom control display dialogue box. Users can add their own buttons, toggles, icons, gauges, sliders, text entries, value entries, bar charts and bars widgets to it. Data variables and commands can be assigned to these widgets to allow users to build their own specific interfaces. Within each window users can switch between use/edit modes to move, add, and edit widgets. Custom dialogue settings are saved to the users ini file for subsequent reuse. Users can save custom dialogue settings to and from external files. This provides a method of passing custom settings between users.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Backdrop:</font> Option to add a graphic image to the background of the main window. Six default options are provided together with a n option for a user defined bitmap. The background image can be optionally tiled to repeat the pattern over the entire region. Alternatively if not tiled the image will be stretched to fill the area.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / User Backdrop File&:</font> File browser to identify the user specified backdrop bitmap.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Window / Tile Backdrop:</font> Defines whether backdrop image will be stretched or tiled to fill the area.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The <font color="#0000ff">Window</font> menu has appended to it an entry for each child window. Child windows include graphic displays all graphs and results displays.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Pull Down Menu Items - Help<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Help / Contents (F1):</font></font> Opens this help file at the contents page.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Help / Search for Help On&:</font> Opens this help file at the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">index</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> page to allow for searching through the help file by key words.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Help / How to Use Help:</font></font></font> Opens the standard WindowsŽ Help document, describing how to use on-line help files.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Help / About Lotus Suspension Analysis&:</font> Displays the Lotus Suspension Analysis <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">about</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> box listing both the major and minor release levels. Support contact details are also given.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font><b><font size="4">Mouse Right Button Menu Items </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphics<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2">
|
||
<br>
|
||
No specific menus are used on the graphics display for the right mouse button, Instead it is used as a quick cycle through the available <u>tracking directions</u></font> or cycle through the <u>dynamic viewing modes</u> as appropriate for the current dynamic viewing status.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In the view <u>zoom</u> mode the right mouse button will cancel the zoom event.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Mouse Right Button Menu Items </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphs<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Y-Variable (SDF):</font></font> Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected <u>graph</u>. Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current variable is shown checked in the list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Y-Variable (Front Graphic):</font> Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current front suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Y-Variable (Rear Graphic):</font> Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected graph to one from the current rear suspension graphical elements. Lists all available options, (some may not actually have a plotable result). The current variable is shown checked in the list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Front (+Y) User Line:</font> Lists the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front +Y corner.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Front (-Y) User Line:</font> Lists the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the front -Y corner.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Rear (+Y) User Line:</font></font></font> Lists the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear +Y corner.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Rear (-Y) User Line:</font> Lists the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> user line for viewing and editing. The number of points well as the x and y values can edited. On closure the user line data is checked for ascending order on the x-values, if not ascending the data is shuffled unit it is. Not that individual user lines are defined for each corner. This is for the rear -Y corner.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Autoscale:</font></font></font> Autoscales the selected graph for both x and y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Autoscale Y only:</font> Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. To autoscale all graphs use the main menu or equivalent toolbar icon.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Autoscale to Y Increment:</font> Autoscales the selected graph for just its y-axes. Includes all visible lines on the graph. The autoscale function is based rounding to a specified increment. The increment being definable for each individual graph. To edit the increment refer to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Axis Scales</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> right mouse menu option.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Zoom:</font> Pick the area of the selected graph to fit the current window. The zoom function can accommodate either a two press approach to area selection or a single press, hold and drag selection, a simple time delay trap being used to identify which type is being used. The zoomed area will become the plotted region.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Copy Front Data to User:</font> Convenience function copies the existing Front result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values are copied over.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Copy Rear Data to User:</font> Convenience function copies the existing Rear result line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values are copied over.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Copy Front Scope to User from / Position n:</font></font></font> Convenience function copies the existing Front scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Copy Rear Scope to User from / Position n:</font></font></font> Convenience function copies the existing Rear scope line to the User Line. Only the selected graphs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> values are copied over. You need to identify which scope position you are copying from.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Axis Scales:</font> Displays the selected graphs x and y-axis settings. Axes are defined simply by the minimum and maximum values. This display also lists the value used for the autoscale to Y increment option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Set All X-axis to Displ. Range:</font> Sets the x-axis settings for all the graphs to the limits of the currently defined suspension travel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit All X-axis Scale:</font> Displays the x-axis scale edit box. The displayed values will be the current settings for the selected graph. All graphs will have their x-axis values set to the entered numbers.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">List Data Line(s):</font> Lists the selected graphs current results (data) line for viewing. As these are calculated results they are display only. Both front and rear axles are listed, (if applicable).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Copy to Clipboard:</font> Copies the selected graph display to the Windows clipboard such that it can be pasted into other applications.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Save to File&:</font> Saves the selected graph to file. Three format types are currently supported, bmp, jpg and png.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Open in MATLAB:</font> Opens the selected graph directly in Matlab as a graph. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Matlab. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Matlab product, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Matlab product via the menu option <i>Setup / Re-run search for installed components.</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Open in EXCEL:</font> Opens a new Excel worksheet filled with the selected graphs data values. This thus provides a 'one-click' option to pass graph data from Shark to Excel. If this option is greyed out then the application has been unable to identify the location of the Excel executable, normally because it is not installed on the machine. If it has been subsequently installed users can re-scan for the Excel executable via the menu option <i>Setup / Re-run search for installed components.</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Mouse Right Button Menu Items </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance Coefficients<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The right mouse menu on the <u>compliance coefficients</u></font> display has two forms the long form and the short form. The long form is listed if the selection is within a bar region of the chart and the short form is the pick is on the chart but not on a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">bar</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Y Variable:</font></font></font> Used to change the displayed y-variable for the selected bar. Lists all available options, (some may not be relevant to the current module or model). The current bars variable is shown checked in the list.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Limit Setting:</font> Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> design limit value. This is used to draw a horizontal line on the bar chart as a visual indicator of the analysis results.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Scale Setting:</font></font></font> Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> full-scale deflection value. This should be adjusted to encompass the required/anticipated limit.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit Weighting Setting:</font></font></font> Displays for viewing and editing, the selected bars<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> weighting value used to calculate the combined summation of selected variables. This effects the optimization and total sum display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Remove Selected Variable:</font> .Removes the selected bar from its force sets graph.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Add Extra Variable:</font> For the selected force sets<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> graph, an extra variable is added to the display. This variable is changed via the Y-variable menu option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Set All Limit Values to Current:</font></font></font> For all defined compliance bars the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Limit</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> value is set to the current value. This is a convenience feature that quickly defines a complete set of limits.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Autoscale All Visible Lines:</font> All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to the current values, with a clip margin. This enables all compliance factors to be visible through a single menu selection.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Set All Visible Line Scales to Unity:</font> All defined compliance bars have the Scale settings set to unity. This enables all compliance factor scale settings to be returned to unity through a single menu selection.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Edit All Line Limits/Scale/Weights&:</font> Opens a display window that allows all Limits, Scales and Weightings for the compliance curves to be edited through a single display rather than by picking individually.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Include Spring Force in Set:</font> For the selected force set toggles whether the spring force is included in the compliant calculation.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Make Force Set Default:</font> Makes the selected force set the current one. The current one is indicated by the red highlight, and becomes the force set displayed on the graphics and graphs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Turn Force Set </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">Off</font></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">:</font></font></font> turns the status of the selected force set to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Its data is not lost but it will not be used in the calculations and its compliant chart will be removed from the display.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Turn All Force Sets </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">On</font></font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font color="#0000ff"><font face="Arial">:</font></font></font> Sets all defined force sets to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">on</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Each force set will then have its own graph displayed.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Open External Forces Edit&:</font></font></font> Opens the <u>external force</u> edit box. This allows the current external force settings to be viewed and edited.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Icon Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> General<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">The following icons are used within the application dialogue boxes. A brief description is given for each.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm128.bmp" title="bm128.bmp"> Generic Editor Icon, normally opens standard data editor display.<br>
|
||
</b></font></font></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm129.bmp" title="bm129.bmp"> Opens this Help File at context sensitive page<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Icon Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> File Toolbar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">The following icons are displayed on the File toolbar. A brief description is given for each.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm130.bmp" title="bm130.bmp"> Open existing data file.<br>
|
||
</b></font></font></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm131.bmp" title="bm131.bmp"> Save data to file<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm132.bmp" title="bm132.bmp"> Change to 2D <u>module</u></b><b>, Bump articulation<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm133.bmp" title="bm133.bmp"> Change to 2D <u>module</u></b><b>, Roll articulation<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm134.bmp" title="bm134.bmp"> Change to 3D <u>module</u></b><b>, Bump articulation<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm135.bmp" title="bm135.bmp"> Change to 3D <u>module</u></b><b>, Roll articulation<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm136.bmp" title="bm136.bmp"> Change to 3D <u>module</u></b><b>, Steer articulation<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm137.bmp" title="bm137.bmp"> Change to move ground plane in bump solver option<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm138.bmp" title="bm138.bmp"> Change to move body in bump solver option<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm139.bmp" title="bm139.bmp"> Toggle 3D <u>compliant</u></b><b> solver setting<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm140.bmp" title="bm140.bmp"> Toggle 3D compliance use <u>external forces</u></b><b> setting<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm141.bmp" title="bm141.bmp"> Toggle <u>Tolerance analysis</u></b><b> status<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm142.bmp" title="bm142.bmp"> Set to <u>Edit</u></b><b> mode<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm143.bmp" title="bm143.bmp"> Set to <u>Joggle</u></b><b> edit mode<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm144.bmp" title="bm144.bmp"> Set to <u>Drag</u></b><b> edit mode<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Icon Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> View Toolbar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">The following icons are displayed on the view toolbar. A brief description is given for each.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm145.bmp" title="bm145.bmp"> Toggle <u>dynamic viewing</u></b></font></font></font><b> on/off.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm146.bmp" title="bm146.bmp"> Set dynamic view on and mode to translate.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm147.bmp" title="bm147.bmp"> Set dynamic view on and mode to scale.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm148.bmp" title="bm148.bmp"> Set dynamic view on and mode to rotate.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm149.bmp" title="bm149.bmp"> Start zoom event on the graphics display.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm150.bmp" title="bm150.bmp"> Autoscale all open graphs.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm151.bmp" title="bm151.bmp"> Set graphics view style to Wire Frame.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm152.bmp" title="bm152.bmp"> Set graphics view style to Solid Fill.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm153.bmp" title="bm153.bmp"> Set graphics view style to Hidden Line.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm154.bmp" title="bm154.bmp"> Set graphics view style to Depth Buffered (flat shaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm155.bmp" title="bm155.bmp"> Set graphics view to Y-Z plane.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm156.bmp" title="bm156.bmp"> Set graphics view to X-Z plane.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm157.bmp" title="bm157.bmp"> Set graphics view to X-Y plane.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm158.bmp" title="bm158.bmp"> Save current graphics view to temporary store.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm159.bmp" title="bm159.bmp"> Cycle though the available <u>tracking</u></b><b> options, or the available <u>dynamic view</u></b><b> options.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Icon Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphics Toolbar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">The following icons are displayed on the Graphics toolbar. A brief description is given for each.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm160.bmp" title="bm160.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point template numbers.<br>
|
||
</b></font></font></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm161.bmp" title="bm161.bmp"> Turns point limits to </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">use</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">. If the current visibility setting of the <u>limit boxes</u></font></b></font><b> was </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">off</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> they will be turned </font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">on</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm162.bmp" title="bm162.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the hard point co-ordinates.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm163.bmp" title="bm163.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the springs</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> enhanced graphics.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm164.bmp" title="bm164.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the dampers</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> enhanced graphics.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm165.bmp" title="bm165.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the wheels</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> enhanced graphics.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm166.bmp" title="bm166.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the pivots</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> enhanced graphics.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm167.bmp" title="bm167.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the grids</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> enhanced graphics.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm168.bmp" title="bm168.bmp"> Toggles the visibility on the graphics display of the body</b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">s enhanced graphics. Will only appear if a default body type has been set, (see data menu).<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm169.bmp" title="bm169.bmp"> Set the graphics display to show both front and rear axle models, (if loaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm170.bmp" title="bm170.bmp"> Sets the graphic display to show the front suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a rear suspension loaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm171.bmp" title="bm171.bmp"> Sets the graphic display to show the rear suspension model only, (note you will not be able to select this option if you only have a front suspension loaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm172.bmp" title="bm172.bmp"> Toggles the <u>animation</u></b><b> status. Stops or starts the animation of the model over the currently set articulation range.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm173.bmp" title="bm173.bmp"> Toggles the graphics display setting for drawing both suspension sides.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm174.bmp" title="bm174.bmp"> Copies the current graphic display to the WindowsŽ clipboard.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Icon Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphs + Data Toolbar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">The following icons are displayed on the Graphs + Data toolbar. A brief description is given for each.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm175.bmp" title="bm175.bmp"> Open a new results <u>graph</u></b></font></font></font><b>.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm176.bmp" title="bm176.bmp"> Autoscales all open graphs.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm177.bmp" title="bm177.bmp"> Opens the model property display. Tree structure based display to access model properties.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm178.bmp" title="bm178.bmp"> Opens the front suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only rear suspension loaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm179.bmp" title="bm179.bmp"> Opens the rear suspension hard point values for viewing and editing, (not available if only front suspension loaded).<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm180.bmp" title="bm180.bmp"> Lists the Parameters data set for viewing and editing.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm181.bmp" title="bm181.bmp"> Lists the Tyre data set values for viewing and editing.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm182.bmp" title="bm182.bmp"> Opens the Suspension Derivative File (SDF). This scrollable textual display lists the an echo of the suspension hard points and incremental listings of the relevant suspension characteristics for all articulation types.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm183.bmp" title="bm183.bmp"> Saves the current suspension hard points to a temporary store, given a unique label for possible later retrieval. This temporary store only exists whilst the application is open such that all saved co-ordinate sets are lost when the application is closed. Any number of sets can be stored.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm184.bmp" title="bm184.bmp"> Cancels the current <u>group</u></b><b> selection, returning back to all hard points accessible for individual editing.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm185.bmp" title="bm185.bmp"> Creates an new points group. A new group must be given a unique label to identify it. The number of points required to add to it set and each required point picked from the available suspension end lists.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm186.bmp" title="bm186.bmp"> Runs a utility function that will reset the vehicle model to a new ride height. The value required is a delta from the current position. A positive value lowers the body, i.e. reduces the ride height.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm187.bmp" title="bm187.bmp"> Option to list suspension hard points at a defined bump plus steer position. Define the required bump value, (+ve is in bump) and steer value.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm188.bmp" title="bm188.bmp"> Automatic window positioning option. All open windows are re-sized to a common size and cascaded down from the top left hand corner in regular steps.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b><img data="bm189.bmp" title="bm189.bmp"> Convenience routine to <u>convert</u></b><b> existing 2D model data to selected 3D suspension.<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements - Introduction<br>
|
||
</font></b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
This section describes the data requirements for both the 2D and 3D suspension analysis modules. Each data variable is listed, together with its units and any default value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The listings are broken down into sections as they are displayed in the interface.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Co-ordinate System<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">SHARK</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> co-ordinate system is a right handed system with the Y-axis across the car track, the origin of which is assumed to be on the vehicle centre line and the +ve direction being towards the offside suspension (Right hand Corner sitting in car). The X-axis is along the vehicle wheelbase, normally with the origin in front of the vehicle with the +ve direction towards the rear. The X-axis only applies to the 3D module, all 2D modes being in the Y-Z or cross car plane. The Z-axis is the vertical height, the origin of which for 2D modes is assumed to be the ground plane, but for the 3D modes can be at any height position. The +ve direction is taken as upwards, (note this co-ordinate system is different to the original UNIX version of SHARK, which had the X and Y axes transposed).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm190.bmp" title="bm190.bmp"><br>
|
||
<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">SHARK</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Co-ordinate System<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Data Requirements<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 2D module has some specific requirements for data. It has a reduced set of <u>suspension types</u></font> when compared to the 3D module, whilst its <u>General data</u> set has variables unique to the 2D module. Some of the General data values are common to both the 2D and 3D modules and will be covered in the description of the <u>3D data</u> requirements.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Suspension Type<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The available suspension types for the 2D module are <u>Double Wishbone</u></font> or <u>Macpherson Strut</u>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm7.bmp" title="bm7.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the 2D Suspension type from the New menu<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D General Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Vehicle Track,</b></font> (real), (units mm), (default 1600 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the static vehicle track, the value is the Y-axis distance between the two assumed tyre contact patch centre<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s. Must be a positive number<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin Angle, </b></font></font> (real), (units deg), (default 10 deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the static kingpin angle, being the angle between the upper and lower ball joints in the Y-Z or cross car plane for a double wishbone suspension type, or the angle between the strut top and the lower ball joint, again in the Y-Z plane, for a Macpherson strut suspension. A positive Kingpin angle is taken as when the upper ball joint, (or strut top), is inboard of the lower ball joint, i.e. smaller Y value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin Offset at Ground, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the static Kingpin offset, the offset being the Y-axis or cross car distance between the tyre contact patch centre and the intersection of the kingpin axis with the ground. A positive offset is when the tyre contact patch centre is outboard of the kingpin axis intersection. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Damper Angle, </b> (real), (units deg), (default 10 deg) {<b>Strut Only</b>}<br>
|
||
Sets the static damper angle, being the angle between the strut top and a point on the strut slider axis, in the Y-Z plane. A positive damper angle is taken as when the strut top is inboard of the strut slider point, i.e. smaller Y value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Camber Change in Bump, </b> (real), (deg/mm), (default -0.04 deg/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.<b><u><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>Camber Change in Rebound, </b>(real), (deg/mm), (default -0.04 deg/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with positive wheel travel.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><font face="Times New Roman"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial"><b>Camber Change in Roll, </b></font></font> (real), (units deg/mm), (default 0.5 deg/deg)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined camber change line on the camber angle against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required wheel camber angle under roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in positive camber with a positive roll angle.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Static Roll Centre Height, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 50 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the static roll centre height, this is the distance up the Z-axis from the ground plane to the required static roll centre.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Roll Centre Height Change in Bump, </b>(real), (units mm/mm), (default 1.0 mm/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the bump travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in bump travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>Roll Centre Height Change in Rebound, </b>(real), (units mm/mm), (def 1.0 mm/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height graph over the rebound travel region. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in rebound travel, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in the roll centre height with positive wheel travel.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
</u></b><b>Roll Centre Height Change in Roll, </b>(real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre height line on the roll centre height against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre height in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre height with a positive roll angle. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Roll Centre Lateral Change in Roll, </b>(real), (units mm/deg), (default 0.0 mm/mm)<br>
|
||
This value is used initially to set the user defined roll centre lateral line on the roll centre lateral against roll graph. It is subsequently used to define the required roll centre lateral position in roll articulation, when a degree of freedom is introduced into the suspension model. A positive value indicates an increase in roll centre lateral Y value with a positive roll angle.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>Bump Travel, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>No. of Bump Solution Steps, </b> (integer), (default 4)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full bump travel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rebound Travel, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>No. of Rebound Solution Steps, </b> (integer), (default 4)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full rebound travel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Roll Travel, </b> (real), (units deg), (default 5 deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the X-axis. Must be a positive number.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>No. of Roll Solution Steps, </b> (integer), (default 4)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of solution steps performed between static and full roll.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>2D Double Wishbone Suspension Hard Points<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
<b>Lower Outer Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Upper Outer Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 500 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 248 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Lower Inner Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 175 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Upper Inner Cross Car (Y), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 367 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Upper Inner Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 426 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the upper wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
(Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
2D Macpherson Strut Suspension Hard Points<br>
|
||
</font><br>
|
||
<b>Lower Outer Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone outer ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Strut Top Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 500 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the strut top, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Lower Inner Cross Car (Y), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 248 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Y co-ordinate of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the vehicle centre line. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Lower Inner Height (Z), </b> (real), (units mm), (default 175 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the static Z height of the lower wishbone inner ball joint, relative to the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
(Note: All 2D suspension Z co-ordinates are relative to an assumed zero ground plane, i.e., Z origin is ground plane.)<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Data Requirements<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D module data requirements are broken down in to sets. Each set is described separately. The data requirements for each of the default <u>suspension template</u></font> types is listed. Some of the data sets given here apply in part to both the 3D module and the 2D module.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Suspension End<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Suspension models are defined as being associated to either the </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Front</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Read</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> end of the vehicle. The allowable suspension templates vary depending on this selection, since front suspension types must be steerable.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Complete vehicle models can be built, (i.e. Front and Rear models), by creating one of each through the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">new</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> menu.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm0.bmp" title="bm0.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the Suspension end and templates from the New display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Suspension Type<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>3D Suspension Type<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Since users can create/delete and include their own templates the lists given here may not be the same as displayed. The presented lists represent the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">standard</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates that are </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">hard-coded</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> into the as-shipped application.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>For front suspension<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
Select From:
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">S</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> link.<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 20 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 22 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints spring front.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 23 Double wishbone, anti roll bar<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 24 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 25 Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 26 Double wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 27 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin lower link.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For rear suspension<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s<br>
|
||
|
||
Select From:
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 2 <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">H</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> frame lower, single upper link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 4 Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 5 5-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 7 Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 8 4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard Rod).<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 9 4-Link Rigid Axle, (twin upper).<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 10 Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 11 Semi trailing arm.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 16 Non-Steerable lower <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">A</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> with toe link.<br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">S</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 19 Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 20 Double Wishbone, twin outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 21 5-Link Rigid Axle, (Watts Linkage).<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 22 Double Wishbone, Twin outer ball joints, Spring front.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 23 Double Wishbone, anti roll bar. <br>
|
||
</font></font>
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 24 Steerable Macpherson Strut, twin outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 25 Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 26 Double Wishbone, compliant rack, damper to lower.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 27 Steerable Mcpherson Strut, twin lower link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 28 4-Link Rear, transverse control link.<br>
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
Type 29 Twist Beam <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> twin Wheel.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm8.bmp" title="bm8.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Selecting the Front Suspension template from the New display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D General Data (Parameters)<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>3D General Data<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
<b>Bump Travel, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the bump travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. Note that the bump and rebound travel values would normally define an even increment bounded articulation definition. This can be changed to a step-by-step definition sequence similar to that used for the combined mode but with out any steering input. This is enabled/edited through the <i>Data / Use Extended Bump Travel</i> and <i>Data / Edit Extended Bump Travel </i>menu options.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rebound Travel, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the rebound travel from static ride, it is the distance in the Z-axis that the ground plane, (or body), is moved through. Must be a positive number. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Bump/Rebound Increment, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 5 mm)<br>
|
||
Set the solution step size in bump and rebound when animating or listing SDF<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s. See also bump travel above with regard to extended bump travel option.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Roll Angle, </b> (real), (units deg), (default 3 deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the roll travel from static ride, it is the total angle that the body is rolled about the Y-axis. Must be a positive number.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Roll Increment, </b> (real), (units deg), (default 0.25 deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the solution step size in roll when animating or listing SDF<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Steer Travel, </b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 30.0 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the limit of steering travel for the inner ball joint in the X-axis or cross car direction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Steer Increment, </b> (real), (units mm), (default 2.0 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the solution step size in steering when animating or listing SDF<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Wheelbase,</b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 2240 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the static vehicle wheelbase, the value is the Y-axis distance between the front and rear wheel centre<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s. Must be a positive number.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>C of G Height, </b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the static centre of gravity height, the distance in the Z-axis of the C of G from the ground plane.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Breaking On Front,</b> (real), (units %), (default 60 %)<br>
|
||
Defines the brake split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % braking effort on the front axle.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Drive On Front,</b> (real), (units %), (default 0 %)<br>
|
||
Defines the drive split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % drive to the front axle. Thus a rear wheel drive car has a value of 0%, whilst a front wheel drive car has a value of 100%.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Weight On Front,</b> (real), (units %), (default 40 %)<br>
|
||
Defines the weight split between the front and rear axles, by defining the % weight on the front axle.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Brake Type, </b>(integer), (default 2)<br>
|
||
Defines the brake type for the front suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Brake Type, </b>(integer), (default 2)<br>
|
||
Defines the brake type for the rear suspension as either inboard (1), or outboard (2).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Total Sprung Weight, </b>(real), (units kg) (default 0.0)<br>
|
||
Defines the total sprung weight of the vehicle, (sum of front and rear).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Suspension Type, </b>(integer), (default 1)<br>
|
||
Defines the suspension type for the front suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Suspension Type, </b>(integer), (default 1)<br>
|
||
Defines the suspension type for the rear suspension as either independent (1), or rigid (2).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm191.bmp" title="bm191.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Parameters (General Data) data set<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Body Type<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D body type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>
|
||
None<br>
|
||
|
||
Saloon<br>
|
||
|
||
Open Sports<br>
|
||
|
||
Old Single Seater<br>
|
||
|
||
Single Seater<br>
|
||
|
||
Utility<br>
|
||
|
||
Super Saloon<br>
|
||
|
||
Mini Van<br>
|
||
|
||
User Defined<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm192.bmp" title="bm192.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Example Graphics <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Open Sports Body Type Shown<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For the user defined body it is possible to define the body graphics as a combination of 3d vectors and 3d facets. To edit the user defined body data select the menu option <i>Data / Edit User Body Data&</i> The displayed spread-sheet has two paneled tabs. The first is for 3d vectors, where each vector requires a start point and an end point. The second tab is for 3d facets where each facet can be a <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">n</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> noded planar facet. Each node of the facet requires an x, y and z co-ordinate.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The body data can be populated with one of the standard types to act as a start point. Use the local <i>File / Load Standard body Data</i> menus to do this.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Body facet data can also be imported from an external STL file. Scaling and shift options are offered to manipulate the imported STL facets.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The application is currently restricted to a maximum of 10 noded facets and a total of 2000 facets and 800 vectors.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Tyre Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 2D module has some specific requirements for data.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Rolling Radius,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 225 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the relevant tyres rolling radius.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tyre Width,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 150 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the relevant tyre width, used to support graphical display only.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Vertical Stiffness,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 400 N/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the relevant tyres vertical stiffness, used in the compliance analysis.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Spring Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 14 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the diameter of the graphical spring used to optionally represent the tyre vertical spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Other related graphical items such as colour can also be edited through this display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Enhanced Tyre and Spring<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The graphical representation of the tyre and wheel can be extended beyond the default. The user can define a cross section that is then revolved around the spindle axis. These user profiles can thus include much more surface definition than the simple models.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm193.bmp" title="bm193.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Tyre data set<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Steering Type<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D steering type is a menu selection rather than a data variable. The menu choices are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>
|
||
Steering Rack<br>
|
||
|
||
Steering Box<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm10.bmp" title="bm10.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Setting the Steering type from the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">New</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> menu<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The steering box option requires additional data hard points to be defined:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 101:
|
||
1st Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 102:
|
||
2nd Point on Box Axis, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 103:
|
||
Pitman Joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm194.bmp" title="bm194.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Editing the Steering Box Hard Point Data<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Titles<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The data for the title block is intended for use as a labelling/description mechanism. This optional data block is only accessible via the <i>Data / Titles&</i></font> menu item.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm195.bmp" title="bm195.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the titles section<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Bush Properties<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Bush Properties data is displayed by hard point and is added to the bottom of the normal points</font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position edit box when in compliant mode. A bush has a local co-ordinate system defined relative to the global Cartesian set. The bushes stiffness properties are then defined in this local co-ordinate system.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The individual data fields are:<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">absolute</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to global Cartesian origin).<br>
|
||
</font></font><b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point on Bush local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">relative</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to selected hard points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position).<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Point on Bush local Z-Axis, Pnt,</b> (choice), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point in Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">absolute</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to global Cartesian origin).<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Point on Bush local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">relative</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to selected hard points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position).<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Bush Local Stiffness, X, Y and Z,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 1000 N/mm or 2000 N/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the translational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>Bush Local Stiffness, X-X, Y-Y and Z-Z,</b> (real), (units N.m/Rad), (default 0 N.m/Rad)<br>
|
||
Sets the rotational stiffness of the current bush in the defined local axes.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm196.bmp" title="bm196.bmp"><br>
|
||
Bush Properties <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Example Complaint Data<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The bush edit dialog box attempts to stop invalid bush axes definitions. These normally occur when the z-axis point and the point in the x-y plane are the same or are along the same vector. Typical examples of these occur with the compliant rack models when the z-axis point is aligned relative to the other rack bush but the x-y point has not been changed from the default.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The inclusion of a compliant racks bush also normally requires that the rotational stiffness values are defined for the rack bushes to control the rack rotations.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D External Force Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The External Force data is displayed by </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Set</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. Each set is a collection of forces, each force having a definition in terms of its head and tail positions, attachment part and magnitude. Force head and tail positions are defined in either absolute position or relative to a hard point position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The individual data fields are:<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Description,</b> (string), (units none), (default none)<br>
|
||
Label for the force set.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>End,</b> (selection), (units none), (default none)<br>
|
||
Identifies which suspension corner to apply the force too.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Apply to Part,</b> (selection), (units none), (default none)<br>
|
||
Identifies which part in the selected corners<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> suspension to apply the force too.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Magnitude,</b> (real), (units N), (default 0 N)<br>
|
||
Defines the magnitude of the force.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Force Head, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-orindate system origin.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Force Head, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of the force head in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as selected hard point.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordinate system origin taken as global co-orindate system origin.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Pnt.,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as selected hard point.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Force Tail, X, Y and Z, Rel. to Head,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of the force tail in the global Cartesian co-ordinate system, co-ordiante system origin taken as the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">head</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> of the current force.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm197.bmp" title="bm197.bmp"><br>
|
||
External Forces Properties <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Example Data<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></font></font></center>
|
||
<b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Part C of G Properties<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The C of G Properties data is displayed by part. Each part optionally has a point attached to it that is identified as the C of G point. If a template does not have an associated C of G point either an existing point can be flagged as the C of G by editing the template, or a new point can be added to the template via the <i>Edit / Add to Model / Part C of Gs</i></font> menu options. A point added to the template in this way is automatically flagged as being a C of G point. C of G points are only visible when in compliant mode and are drawn as a green and black quadrant symbol. An additional set of visibility switches are used for C of G points that control point visibility, axis marker points and axes. Older model files will not have C of G points in them and will need modifying to match the updated templates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm198.bmp" title="bm198.bmp"><br>
|
||
C of G Marker Point <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Screen Shot<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Part mass properties enable modal frequencies and forced-damped responses to be identified.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The individual data fields are:<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point Label,</b> (string), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets a string label for each point.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Kinematic Point Coordinates (Global),</b> (real), (unit mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Lists the current kinematic hard point co-ordinates.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">absolute</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to global Cartesian origin).<br>
|
||
</font></font><b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point on C of G local Z-Axis, X, Y and Z, Rel,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">relative</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to selected hard points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position).<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Point on C of G local Z-Axis, Pnt,</b> (choice), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local Z-axis for the current hard points bush local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is by selecting another hard point in the suspension model. Typical use of this would be in aligning a bush axis along a wishbone axis by pointing towards the second point on the pivot axis.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Abs,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in absolute x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">absolute</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to global Cartesian origin).<br>
|
||
</font></font><b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point in C of G local X-Z Plane, X, Y and Z, Rel,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the position of a point on the local X-Z plane for the current hard points C of G local axes, (local axis origin is the current points kinematic position). This definition is in relative x, y and z co-ordinates, (<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">relative</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> implies relative to selected hard points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> position).<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>C of G Mass,</b> (real), (units Kg), (default 1.0 Kg)<br>
|
||
Sets the mass of the part that this point is the C of G marker for.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>C of G Local Inertia, Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz and Iyz,</b> (real), (units kg/mm2)<br>
|
||
Sets the 6 inertia values for the part. Inertia properties are defined about the local axis system that has been defined by the points above.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm199.bmp" title="bm199.bmp"><br>
|
||
C of G Properties <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Example Data<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 1: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 1 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm200.bmp" title="bm200.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 1, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm201.bmp" title="bm201.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 1, Schematic<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 2: </font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">H</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Frame Lower, Single Upper Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 2 </b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">H</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> frame lower, single upper link.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm202.bmp" title="bm202.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 2, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm203.bmp" title="bm203.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 2, Schematic<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 3: Steerable Macpherson Strut<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 3 Steerable Macpherson strut.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm204.bmp" title="bm204.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 3, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm205.bmp" title="bm205.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 3, Schematic<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 4: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 4 Non-Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm206.bmp" title="bm206.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 4, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 5: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod)<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 5 5-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Rod).<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
|
||
Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 7 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm207.bmp" title="bm207.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 5, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 6: Double Wishbone, Damper to Upper Wishbone<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 6 Double Wishbone, damper to upper wishbone.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm208.bmp" title="bm208.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 6, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm209.bmp" title="bm209.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 6, Schematic<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 7: Non-Steerable Macpherson Strut, Toe Link to Wishbone<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 7 Non-Steerable Mac strut, toe link to wishbone.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Strut slider axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Steering link to wishbone ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point on lower arm, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm210.bmp" title="bm210.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 7, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 8: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Panhard Road)<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 8 4-Link Rigid Axle, (Panhard rod).<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Panhard rod body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Panhard rod axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Axle tube <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> stub axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
</font></font>Point 20:
|
||
Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm211.bmp" title="bm211.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 8, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 9: 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 9 4-Link Rigid Axle (Twin Upper)<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
|
||
Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Axle tube - stub axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm212.bmp" title="bm212.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 9, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 10: Trailing Arm, Upper and Lower Rear Links<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 10 Trailing arm, upper and lower rear links.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Trailing arm front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
Upper link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Spring lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm213.bmp" title="bm213.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 10, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 11: Semi Trailing Arm<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 11 Semi trailing arm.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm214.bmp" title="bm214.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 11, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 12: Steerable Twin Parallel Wishbones and Knuckle<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 12 Steerable twin parallel wishbones + knuckle.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Knuckle centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Knuckle upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Knuckle lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Axis point, x,y,z (mm)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm215.bmp" title="bm215.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 12, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 14: Double Wishbone, Push Rod to Damper<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 14 Double wishbone, push rod to damper.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm216.bmp" title="bm216.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 14, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 15: Double Wishbone, Rocker Arm Damper<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 15 Double wishbone, rocker arm damper.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm217.bmp" title="bm217.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 15, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 16: Non-Steerable Lower </font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">A</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> with Toe Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 16 Non-Steerable lower </b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">A</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> with toe link.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Lower link inboard ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Reaction rod outboard point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Reaction rod body point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm218.bmp" title="bm218.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 16, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 17: Double Wishbone, Push Rod Monoshock<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 17 Double wishbone, pushrod monoshock.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Push rod wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Push rod rocker end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Damper to body point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Damper to rocker point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
2nd link 1st rocker end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
2nd link damper rocker end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Damper rocker axis 1st point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Damper rocker axis 2nd point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 28:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 29:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 30:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 31:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 32:
|
||
Part 7 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 33:
|
||
Part 8 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm219.bmp" title="bm219.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 17, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 18: Double Wishbone, Upper Toe Link and </font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">S</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 18 Double wishbone, upper toe link + </b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial">S</font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> link.<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Upper toe link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Upper toe link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Drop link axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 28:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm220.bmp" title="bm220.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 18, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 19: Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Type 19 Hinged Trailing Arm, Twin Lower Link.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Lower rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper link inboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Spring/Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Spring/Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Trailing arm hinge upper joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Trailing arm to body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Trailing arm hinge lower pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm221.bmp" title="bm221.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 19, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 20: Double Wishbone, Twin outer Ball Joints<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Type 20 Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone front link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear link inboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
Upper wishbone front link outboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper Spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, (to front lower link), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear link outboard pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm222.bmp" title="bm222.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 20, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 21: 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage)<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 21 5-Link Rigid Axle (Watts Linkage).<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Right lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Right upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Left lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Left upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Right lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Right upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Left lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
Left upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Watts cross link 1, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Watts cross link 2, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Right spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Right spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Left spring/damper axle, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Left spring/damper body, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Centre pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Right wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Left wheel centre, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel stub axle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Watts upper link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Watts upper link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Watts lower link axle end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Watts lower link body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 28:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 29:
|
||
Part 7 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 30:
|
||
Part 8 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 31:
|
||
Part 9 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm223.bmp" title="bm223.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 21, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 22: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Spring to Front Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 22 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, spring to front link.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 6 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm224.bmp" title="bm224.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 22, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 23: Double Wishbone, Twin Outer Ball Joints, Anti-Roll Bar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 23 Double wishbone, twin outer ball joints, anti-roll bar.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Lower wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Lower wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Upper wishbone front inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 28:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear inner pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 29:
|
||
Upper wishbone front outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 30:
|
||
Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 31:
|
||
Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 32:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 33:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 34:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 35:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 36:
|
||
Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 37:
|
||
Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 38:
|
||
Part 1 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 39:
|
||
Part 2 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 40:
|
||
Part 3 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 41:
|
||
Part 4 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 42:
|
||
Roll Bar Attachment 1<br>
|
||
Point 43:
|
||
Roll Bar Attachment 2<br>
|
||
Point 44:
|
||
Roll Bar to Link 1<br>
|
||
Point 45:
|
||
Roll Bar to Link 2<br>
|
||
Point 46:
|
||
Roll Bar Mount 1<br>
|
||
Point 47:
|
||
Roll Bar Mount 2<br>
|
||
Point 48:
|
||
Roll Bar Revolute<br>
|
||
Point 49:
|
||
Drop Link 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 50:
|
||
Drop Link 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 51:
|
||
Roll Bar 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 52:
|
||
Roll Bar 2 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm225.bmp" title="bm225.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 23, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 24: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Outer Ball Joints<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 24 Steerable Macpherson strut, twin outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone inner front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone inner rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer front ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer rear ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
|
||
Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm226.bmp" title="bm226.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 24, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 25: Double Wishbone, Twin Lower Outer Ball Joints<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 25 Double wishbone, twin lower outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone front outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear inner pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm227.bmp" title="bm227.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 25, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 26: Double Wishbone, Damper to Lower Wishbone, Compliant Rack<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 26 Double wishbone, damper to lower wishbone, compliant rack.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 22:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 23:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 24:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 25:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 26:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 27:
|
||
Upper wishbone front pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 28:
|
||
Upper wishbone rear pivot(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 29:
|
||
Upper wishbone outer ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 30:
|
||
Damper wishbone end(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 31:
|
||
Damper body end(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 32:
|
||
Outer track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 33:
|
||
Inner track rod ball joint(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 34:
|
||
Upper spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 35:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 36:
|
||
Wheel spindle point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 37:
|
||
Wheel centre point(2), x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 38:
|
||
Part 1 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 39:
|
||
Part 2 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 40:
|
||
Part 3 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
Point 41:
|
||
Part 4 C of G(2)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 42:
|
||
Rack Link P1<br>
|
||
Point 43:
|
||
Rack Link P2<br>
|
||
Point 44:
|
||
Rack Mount P1<br>
|
||
Point 45:
|
||
Rack Mount P2<br>
|
||
Point 46:
|
||
Rack Link C of G<br>
|
||
Point 47:
|
||
Rack Housing C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm228.bmp" title="bm228.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 26, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 27: Steerable Macpherson Strut, Twin Lower Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 27 Steerable Mac strut, twin lower link.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Front lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Rear lower link inboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Front lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Rear lower link outboard, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Strut slider upper axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
|
||
Strut top point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Strut slider lower axis point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Steering arm outboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Steering arm inboard end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Spring top centre line, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Spring bottom at centre line, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm229.bmp" title="bm229.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 27, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 28: 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 28 4-Link Rear, Transverse Control Link.<br>
|
||
</b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Lower wishbone front pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Lower wishbone rear pivot, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer front pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Lower wishbone outer rear pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Upper front link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Upper front link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Damper wishbone end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
Lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Wheel spindle point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Wheel centre point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Upper rear link inner ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Upper rear link outer ball joint, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Drop link to upright, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Part 3 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Part 4 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 5 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm230.bmp" title="bm230.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 28, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Type 29: Twist Beam </font></b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Twin Wheel<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
<b>Type 29 Twist Beam </b></font><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Twin Wheel<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
Point 1:
|
||
Trailing arm body point right, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 2:
|
||
Trailing arm body point left, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 3:
|
||
Shear point right, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 4:
|
||
Right damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 5:
|
||
Right damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 6:
|
||
Right upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 7:
|
||
|
||
Right lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 8:
|
||
|
||
Wheel spindle point 1, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 9:
|
||
|
||
Wheel centre point 1, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 10:
|
||
wheel centre point 2, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 11:
|
||
Wheel spindle point 2, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 12:
|
||
Left damper lower trailing arm end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 13:
|
||
Left damper body end, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 14:
|
||
Left upper spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 15:
|
||
Left lower spring pivot point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 16:
|
||
Shear point left, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 17:
|
||
Twist beam point right, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 18:
|
||
Twist beam point left, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
Point 19:
|
||
Centre connection point, x,y,z (mm).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Point 20:
|
||
Part 1 C of G<br>
|
||
Point 21:
|
||
Part 2 C of G<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm231.bmp" title="bm231.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Suspension Type 29, LSA Screen Shot <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Default Co-ordinates<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Solver Tolerances<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D Solver uses a number of tolerances to control the calculation process.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Kinematic Solution Tol.,</b> (real), (units none), (default 1.e-10)<br>
|
||
Controls the solution tolerance used by the kinematic solver in identifying the convergence limit.<br>
|
||
The kinematic solver uses a hybrid approach to find a zero of a system of n non-linear functions in n variables by a modification of the Powell hybrid method.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Bump Small Perturbation Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 0.05 mm)<br>
|
||
The standard approach used by the solver to determine certain derivatives at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental bump displacement. The size of this bump perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Steer Small Perturbation Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 0.05 mm)<br>
|
||
For steerable suspension templates that do not have a identified top and bottom ball joint, the standard approach used by the solver to determine the steering axis at each suspension step position is to use a small incremental steer displacement. The size of this steer perturbation can be changed if necessary to improve solution stability.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm232.bmp" title="bm232.bmp"><br>
|
||
Solver Tolerances Display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D General Defaults<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Control of certain display features relies on a set of user controllable values.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Min Allowable Scale Factor,</b> (real), (units none), (default 0.00001)<br>
|
||
Sets the minimum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming out.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Max Allowable Scale Factor,</b> (real), (units none), (default 500)<br>
|
||
Sets the maximum scale factor allowed when zooming or dynamically viewing the graphics display. This stops the viewing pipeline from failing through excessive zooming in.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tolerance on Point Pick,</b> (real), (units none), (default 0.05)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the pick circle used to check if a point has been selected with the mouse. The value is in 2d screen size, where <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">1</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> is the full screen length. A larger number will make the selection easier but increase the chance of mis-selection.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Tolerance on Coincident Point Pick,</b> (real), (units none), (default 0.02)<br>
|
||
Defined the screen size value used to determine whether two or more points are considered to be coincident. A greater value will lead to more instances of points being considered coincident. <br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Joggle Step Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 10 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the step size used for joggle mode editing. This is the coarse step size, (Ctrl + arrow), whilst the fine step size, (Shift + arrow), will be 1/10th of this.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Animation Update,</b> (real), (units mSec), (default 50 mSec)<br>
|
||
Defines the fastest rate for which animation will update. Machines unable to refresh at this rate will draw at their maximum speed, whilst high specification PC<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s will be clipped to the defined refresh speed. Reducing this value will increase animation frame rate on high end PC</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm233.bmp" title="bm233.bmp"><br>
|
||
General Defaults Display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Deformed Geometry Scalar<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The display of the compliant model displacements has a specific scalar display setting.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Deformed Geometry Scalar,</b> (real), (units none), (default 1.0)<br>
|
||
To assist in viewing the model deflections due to the compliance effects a scalar value is editable. This is equivalent to the Finite-element modal analysis scalar value. Note that this controls both the static display and the animation when in <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">compliant</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> mode.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm234.bmp" title="bm234.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the complaint graphics deformed geometry scalar<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Deformed Geometry Position<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The animation display of the compliant model occurs at a defined incremental position.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Deformed Geometry Position,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 0)<br>
|
||
The animation of compliant deformed geometry is drawn at a defined position. The default setting for this is to animate it at the static position, (0). The deformed geometry at alternative incremental steps can be performed by changing this value. This value is internally clipped to the maximum number of steps available.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm235.bmp" title="bm235.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the complaint graphics deformed geometry position<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Enhanced Graphic Sizes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Enhanced graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Spring Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 45 mm)<br>
|
||
The graphical diameter of the suspension spring is drawn to this diameter.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>No of Spring Coils (max 60),</b> (integer), (units mm), (default 10)<br>
|
||
Sets the No. of coils used when drawing the suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Lower Damper Tube Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the diameter for the lower tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Upper Damper Tube Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the diameter for the upper tube of the damper enhanced graphics element.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Damper Number of Facets (max 19),</b> (integer), (units mm), (default 10)<br>
|
||
The detail of the cylinder used to draw a damper element is controlled by a number of facets.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Pivot Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 10 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the diameter of the cylinder used to graphically illustrate model parts that have been identified as pivot axes.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Pivot No. of Facets (max 19),</b> (integer), (units mm), (default 8)<br>
|
||
The detail of the cylinder used to draw a pivot is controlled by a number of facets.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tyre No of Facets (max 31),</b> (integer), (units mm), (default 21)<br>
|
||
The detail of the facetted tyre representation is controlled by this value.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tyre Diameter Shoulder (0-1),</b> (real), (units mm), (default 0.9)<br>
|
||
Sets the value for the diameter of the tyre shoulder as a fraction of the rolling radius. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tyre Width Shoulder (0-1),</b> (real), (units mm), (default 0.75 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the value for the width of the tyre excluding the shoulder as a fraction of the width. The shoulder is the tapered section of the graphical representation.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>3D Tracking Line Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 150 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the length of the tracking line drawn through each hard point when in edit mode.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Joggle Symbol Size,</b> (real), (units none), (default 0.05)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the joggle symbol used to indicate the current point when in joggle mode. Size is based on screen size.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>C of G Symbol Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the diameter of the symbol used to represent the position of the C of G symbol.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Grid Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the size of the squares used to draw the ground plane grid.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm236.bmp" title="bm236.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Enhanced graphics sizes<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphics Label Sizes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The text labels drawn on the graphics display can be set by the user.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Point Value Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the size of the text used to identify the model template point Nos.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Point No. Size,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 20 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the size of the text used to identify the model hard point co-ordinates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm237.bmp" title="bm237.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Enhanced graphics label sizes<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Compliance Graphic Sizes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Compliance graphics elements have a number of dimensional properties that can be defined by the user.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Ball Joint Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 15 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the diameter of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Rigid</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> ball joints in the compliant model.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Ball Joint Circumferential Complexity,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 10)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the circumferential direction.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Ball Joint Height Complexity,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 10)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of facets applied to the ball joint in the height direction.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Bush Radius,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 12 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the radius of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Bush</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> elements in the complaint model.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Bush Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the length of the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Bush</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> elements in the compliant model.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font><b>Bush Circumferential Complexity,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 10)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the circumferential direction.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
<b>Bush Height Complexity,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 4)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of facets applied to the bush in the height direction.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Bush Axis Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 60 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the length of the lines used to indicate the bush local axes.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Tyre Spring Diameter,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 12 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the diameter of the springs for the compliant tyre element.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>External Force Head,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 30 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the external force head.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>External Force Fixed Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 200 mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the length of the external force arrow, when force display is set to fixed length.<b><u><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</u></b><b>External/Internal Force Scaled Length,</b> (real), (units mm/N), (default 0.2 mm/N)<br>
|
||
Defines the scale factor applied to forces when force display is set to variable length.<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm238.bmp" title="bm238.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Compliance graphics sizes<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graph Markers and Text Sizes<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The user can define the graph marker sizes. Additionally the text sizes on the graphs and the compliance results can be set by the user.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>Data Marker Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Data lines<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Scope Marker Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph Scope lines<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>User Marker Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.05)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the marker symbols for the graph User lines<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Graph Data Values Text Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.03)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the text used to display values of points on the graphs.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Compliance Title Text Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.1)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the text used to display the graph titles on the compliance coefficient results display.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Compliance Label Text Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.067)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the text used to display the variables labels on the compliance coefficient results display.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Compliance Values Text Size,</b> (real), (units screen size 0-1), (default 0.067)<br>
|
||
Defines the size of the text used to display the compliance coefficients on the bar chart results display.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm239.bmp" title="bm239.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the Graph marker and text sizes<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Graphs Decimal Points Display<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The user can define the number of decimal points used on the graph display for individual value displays.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font><b>X-Data Listing,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the X data value list.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Y-Data Listing,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the Y data value list.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Derivative Data Listing,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the derivative value on the data list.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Scope Deviation,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and scope lines.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>User Deviation,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the display of the deviation between the data and user lines.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>X-Axis Label,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed X-Axis value labels.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Y-Axis Label,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed Y-Axis value labels.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Compliance Graph Values,</b> (integer), (units none), (default 3)<br>
|
||
Sets the number of decimal points for the displayed bar chart values on the compliance graphs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm240.bmp" title="bm240.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the displayed Graph Decimal Points settings<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Point Tolerances<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
Individual point tolerances can be edited by locating the point and tolerance of interest through the tree structure presented and setting the actual limiting value. All point tolerances can be set in one go by defining the </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">delta</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> from their current position in each axis and direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font></font>For the individual point tolerances setting, select from tree structure and then edit from;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm241.bmp" title="bm241.bmp"><br>
|
||
Selecting the Point and tolerance to Edit from the tree display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Min X,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Max X,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the X-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Min Y,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Max Y,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Y-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Min Z,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the minimum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b><b>Max Z,</b> (real), (units mm), (default none)<br>
|
||
Sets the maximum allowed hard point value in the Z-axis direction.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm242.bmp" title="bm242.bmp"><br>
|
||
Individual Point Tolerance Editing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">all points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> tolerances setting, all tolerances are edited as positive difference values along each axis direction, (i.e. both positive and negative axis directions are entered as positive values;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>-ve X Tolerance,</b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>+ve X Tolerance,</b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the +ve X-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>-ve Y Tolerance,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>+ve Y Tolerance,</b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the +ve Y-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>-ve Z Tolerance,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>+ve Z Tolerance,</b></font></font> (real), (units mm), (default 25 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the tolerance in the +ve Z-axis direction for the hard point value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm243.bmp" title="bm243.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">All</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> point Tolerances<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Spring Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension spring properties are used to define the spring forces applied to the compliant model, (when enabled). Incremental spring force properties are set by the combination of rate, free length, fitted length and the current spring displacement. Note that only linear rate springs can currently be modeled. All the properties are repeated twice (1) and (2) to support either corner models with two springs or full axle templates.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font>To edit the spring properties select <i>Data / Compliance Data / Spring Properties&</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Spring Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 41.5 N/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the linear spring rate for the front suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Spring Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 41.5 N/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the linear spring rate for the rear suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Spring Free Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 300 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the front suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Spring Free Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 300 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the free (un-compresed) length for the rear suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Spring Fitted Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 246.5 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the fitted (installed) length for the front suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Spring Fitted Length,</b> (real), (units mm), (default 246.5 mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the fitted (installed) length for the rear suspension spring.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm244.bmp" title="bm244.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the 3D Spring Data<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></center>
|
||
<sup>K</sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Damper Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension damper properties are used to define the damping characteristics applied to the compliant model, (when enabled) via the main dampers. The damping due to bushes is included separately via a Bush Loss Angle number that can be edited via the <i>Data / Compliance Data / General Data&</i></font> menu option. Note that only linear damping can currently be modeled.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b>To edit the damper properties select <i>Data / Compliance Data / Damper Properties&</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Damper 1 Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 1 element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Damper 1 Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 1 element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Damper 2 Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the damper rate for the front suspension damper 2 element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Damper 2 Rate,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 0.4 N.s/mm)<br>
|
||
Sets the damper rate for the rear suspension damper 2 element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm245.bmp" title="bm245.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the 3D Damper Data<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Roll Bar Properties<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension roll bar properties are used to define the roll stiffness of the roll bar revolute joint, when included in a template. It only affects compliance results.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font>To edit the roll bar properties select <i>Data / Compliance Data / Roll Bar Properties&</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Front Roll Bar Rate,</b> (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the roll bar rate for the front suspension roll bar element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rear Roll Bar Rate,</b> (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 2.0E6 N.mm/deg)<br>
|
||
Sets the roll bar rate for the rear suspension roll bar element.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm246.bmp" title="bm246.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the 3D Roll Bar Properties<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D General Compliance Data<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The compliant solver uses a number of standard constants in solving the compliant suspension model. These constants can be modified by the user through the data section.<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b></font>To edit th ese general compliance properties select <i>Data / Compliance Data / General Data&</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Singularity Stiffness,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 10. N/mm)<br>
|
||
Defines the stiffness value used within the solver to remove the singularity caused by components such as tie rods. Eliminates the degree of freedom using this arbitrary stiffness value.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rigid (Ball Joint) Stiffness,</b> (real), (units N/mm), (default 1.0e8 N/mm)<br>
|
||
For ball joints defined as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">rigid</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the compliant solver will treat as high stiffness bushes with a constant 3x translational stiffness and 3x zero rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high translational stiffness.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Rigid Rotation Stiffness,</b></font></font> (real), (units N.mm/deg), (default 1.0e8 N.mm/deg)<br>
|
||
For joints defined as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">rotational</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> the compliant solver will treat as a a 6 d.o.f. bush with a constant 3x high translational stiffness and 2x high rotational stiffness. This is the value used for the high rotational stiffness. The translational stiffness is taken as the value above.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Bush Loss Angle,</b> (real), (units deg), (default 3.0 deg)<br>
|
||
Defines the default damping value for a bush. User defined values for individual bushes will overwrite this setting.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm247.bmp" title="bm247.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the 3D General Compliance Data<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></center>
|
||
<b><font size="4">Data Requirements </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D User Definable Templates<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
</font><b>Template Properties<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Each of the template types hard coded into Shark uses a series of properties to identify its form. The properties include;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
Template Number<br>
|
||
|
||
Template Label<br>
|
||
|
||
No of Parts<br>
|
||
|
||
Part Labels<br>
|
||
|
||
No of Points<br>
|
||
|
||
Point Labels/Point Number<br>
|
||
|
||
Point default x, y and z values<br>
|
||
|
||
No of Bushes<br>
|
||
|
||
Point attachments to parts<br>
|
||
|
||
Point Types<br>
|
||
|
||
No of Graphical Elements<br>
|
||
|
||
Graphical element type<br>
|
||
|
||
Graphical element associated points<br>
|
||
<b><u><br>
|
||
</u></b>Together with some additional properties this allows the application to both build, display and analyze the kinematic and compliant models for each template.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Hard Coded Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
By default some 28 templates are hard coded into the application. These are the ones listed in this help file under the <u>3D suspension templates</u> section. It is important to notice that these hard coded templates have a template index number. This allows the data files to refer to a template type by its index number when loaded, using the model structure as defined by the internal template, just replacing the default x, y and z co-ordinates with those in the model file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Adding to the Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
It is possible to add to, (or indeed replace), the standard hard coded templates in two ways. The first is termed as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates, which are automatically loaded on program start-up. Whilst the second is termed </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">user</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates and need to be loaded directly by the user once the application is open. Both </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">user</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates are stored in ASCII text files that could be edited/viewed through any standard text editor.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Default Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">default</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates are loaded on program start-up from the file </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">_User_Templates.Dat</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. This file is searched for in the applications start-up folder, (normally C:\lesoft), and if found is read in. As with the </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">hard coded</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> templates each entry in the default templates file has a template index number, and the default templates properties will be stored at this location. Thus if the index number used clashes with one used by the hard coded templates the hard coded template data will be over written. Whilst this would normally not be recommended it may for example be useful just to change the default point co-ordinates for the hard coded template.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Restoring the Default Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The default templates would normally only be loaded on program start-up. It is possible to change the default templates through some external text editor such that you want to re-apply the default templates during a program run. This may also be required is a user defined template has inadvertently over-written a default template index and you require to re-read the default templates. To do this without having to quit the application select <i>File / Re-Read Default Templates</i>.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Loading User Defined Custom Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
User defined templates are stored in ASCII text files having exactly the same file format as the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">defaults</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> file. As with the hard coded and default templates each entry in a file will have a template index number. This will be the template slot that will be filled with the following template properties. So as with user templates it is possible to over-write a hard coded or default template when reading in user template data. To load user defined templates from an existing file select <i>File / Add Custom Templates</i></font></font> and locate the required file via the browser.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Creating and Editing Templates<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The easiest way of modifying and creating templates is to use the supplied template editing tool. This spread sheet based display allows you to view/modify existing templates or create new ones. To open the template editor select <i>File / Edit Templates&</i><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm248.bmp" title="bm248.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Editing the 3D Template Properties <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Parts Panel<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The display is divided into 4 separate panels, For Parts, Points, Settings and Graphics. As the labels suggest. <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The Parts panel identifies how many parts their are in the template and gives each one a label. An additional part is assumed without it needing to be defined, that is the ground/body.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The Points panel defines how many points there are in the template, gives each one a label and a set of default co-ordinates.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The Settings panel defines how the model is connected. This is done by identifying which parts a point is attached too. If it is attached to two parts (including ground), this implies a connection between these two parts at the defined point. If a point is only attached to one point then it does not define a joint. Additionally the settings panel identify points that have a special function, (listed as gen type). Examples of these special functions damper attachment points, steering rack attachment etc. A point may have more than one special function, (listed under gen. type 1 and gen. type 2).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The graphics panel defines any additional graphical elements that the user requires to visualize the suspension template. A number of different graphic element types are available. By default graphical elements are automatically added for the wheel, stub axle, spring and damper and thus do not need to be added by the user.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Data types, Compulsory, Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Template properties are arranged in sets that are identified by colour.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Compulsory properties, (pale pink), are those that must be defined by the user these include all part and point panel properties together with 4 columns of the settings panel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The other property sets are arranged into three levels, all of which can be filled automatically, but with decreasing levels of confidence. The automatic fill can be enabled and set to the required level via the <i>Data / Auto Fill</i> menu options. By default the Auto fill option is set to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">off</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Level 1, (pale mauve), involves identifying and numbering each of the bushes in the template. Setting the auto fill to level 1 or higher fill automatically populate the relevant column and value entry. This auto fill level is the most reliable and can be used with confidence.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Level 2, (pale green), involves identifying the solution type to be used with each point, column 2 of the settings panel. The combination of general type settings and part connections is used to identify the most suitable solution type from the 10 alternatives. Whilst this level of auto fill works for all the hard coded template types it may need some user intervention for new types, but should be used as a first fill.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Level 3, (pale yellow), covers the specific settings for each points solution, columns 6 to 11 for the settings panel. Where relevant it identifies which other points are used in each points solution. Some solution types require no points whilst some will require as many as six, (see the later discussion on this). This auto-fill level is the most likely to need user intervention to set the required properties.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Testing the Template<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The settings panel properties are used by the solver to identify the number of unknowns, (i.e. solving for one hard point introduces three unknowns x, y and z), and the equations to use for solving these unknowns. Thus for a successful template settings it is required to have as many equations as unknowns. A utility is provide to pre-test the template properties to check for satisfying this criteria. To test the currently displayed template settings select the menu item <i>Data / Run Validation Test</i>. A scrollable text display is listed identifying the current unknowns versus equations status and the form of each equation. (See later section for discussion on solution types).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm249.bmp" title="bm249.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Testing the 3D Template Settings<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Settings Panel </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> General Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
One of the compulsory properties for each point is the General type setting. As stated previously a point may have more than one general type settings. General types are listed in columns 12 and 13. Not all of the general types need appear in every template, although some general types must appear in each. These <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">required</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> general types are identified below.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
The fifteen general types are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>0 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> None:</font></b></font> Defines the point status as having no general type. Examples of this would be most suspension link attachment points to the body and track rod outer ball joints.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>1 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Wheel Centre:</font></b></font> Simple general type that tags the model point used for the wheel centre. Together with the general type 2 below identify the wheel spindle axis. (Required).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>2 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Stub Axle:</font></b></font> Simple general type that tags the model point used to identify the wheel spindle axis. See also type 1 above. (Required).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>3 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Steering Attachment Point:</font></b></font> Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box. The omission of a type 3 point indicates a non-steerable suspension template, and thus will only appear in the rear suspension templates list. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>4 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Damper 1 to Suspension:</font></b></font> Identifies this point as being the attachment of the damper to the suspension system it also identifies the slider of a Macpherson strut. If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the lower point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the slider of a Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>5 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Damper 1 to Body (also Strut top):</font></b></font> Identifies this point as being the upper attachment point of the damper to the body it also identifies the top of a Macpherson strut . If this general type is not identified no damper travel and damper ratios will be determined. Examples of this general type include the upper point of a conventional damper and the point used to identify the top mount of the Macpherson strut. (Optional except for strut suspensions).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>6 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Spring 1 to Suspension: </font></b></font>Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the suspension. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 4 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. This point would not normally be at a connection between two parts point. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>7 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Spring 1 to Body:</font></b></font> Identifies the attachment point of the spring to the body. In the case of a conventional coil-over spring damper this point may be the same as type 5 above. If omitted the spring travel and spring ratio parameters will not be calculated. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>8 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Upper Ball joint:</font></b></font> Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>9 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Lower Ball Joint:</font></b></font> Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>10 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Strut Slider Point:</font></b></font> Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>11 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Strut Lower end Point:</font></b></font> Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>12 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Roll Bar, Bar Attachment: </font></b></font>Identifies the location of the roll bar to drop link connection point. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>13 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Roll Bar Axis Point:</font></b></font> Identifies a point as being on the cross car axis of a roll bars attachment to the body. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>14 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Roll Bar, Link Attachment:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the first connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 32 defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>15 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Rack Lateral Mount Point:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the rack and the body at which the lateral load is taken. Only required if compliant rack force is required on asymmetric loading. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>16 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Rack Mount Point:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the second rack connection point to the body. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>17 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Wheel Centre (2):</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being a second wheel centre. Typically this implies a rigid axle type of suspension template as it is normal to model independent suspension as individual corners. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>18 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Damper 2 to Suspension:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. It could be the left hand side damper in a rigid axle template or the second damper in a two damper corner model, (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>19 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Damper 2 to Body:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the second damper and the suspension. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>20 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Spring 2 to Suspension:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. It could be the left hand side spring in a rigid axle template or the second spring in a twin spring corner model, (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>21 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Spring 2 to Body:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the connection between the second spring and the suspension. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>22 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Rigid Axle Revolute:</font></b></font> Defines the point as being the revolute joint required by the over constrained rigid axle templates in kinematic mode. It adds a rotational degree of freedom to allow roll motion to occur kinematically. This rotation is then removed by applying equal and opposite torque<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">s in complaint mode as pre-loads of a stiff bush. (Optional). <br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>23 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Stub Axle (2):</font></b></font> Identifies a second stub axle point used in twist beam type templates where both sides are modelled in one go but have different stub axle references.. (Optional). <br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>24 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Shear Point:</font></b></font> Used just for twist beam suspensions to identify the different pivot point position used in bump and roll. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>25 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Part C of G Point:</font></b></font> Used to identify a point as being the C of G point for its primary part. It is normal for this point to not be used except as the C of G point, i.e. no involved in any joints. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>26 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Upper Ball joint(2):</font></b></font> Identifies a point as being the upper ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the lower ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>27 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Lower Ball Joint(2):</font></b></font> Identifies a point as being the lower ball joint for the steering axis on full axle templates only. This must be a connection between two parts to conform with the concept of a steering axis. It is an optional setting in that if it (and the upper ball joint) are not defined the steering axis is determined via a small perturbation of the steering input mechanism. If it can be defined it will lead to faster solution times than the small perturbation method. (Optional).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>28 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Strut Slider Point(2)</font></b></font> Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the top bush for the strut for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut body). (Required for Struts).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>29 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Strut Lower end Point(2):</font></b></font> Sets the point for a Macpherson strut suspension type that is considered to be the location of the strut lower bush for full axle templates only, (attached to the strut slider). (Required for Struts).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>32 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Roll Bar, Link Attachment(2):</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the second connection between the roll bar drop link and the suspension. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have both this and point 14 defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>33 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Steering Attachment Point(2):</font></b></font> Identifies which suspension link end point should be used for the steering input from the rack or steering box for the second end in a full axle model only. See also point 3 above. This point should be the inboard end of the track rod, i.e. link point connected to body or rack. (Optional). For a compliant rack to be added to the model this point must be defined together with point 3 above.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>34 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Roll Bar, Revolute Joint:</font></b></font> Identifies the point as being the centre point of a two part roll bar. In kinematic mode this is treated as a simple revolute allowing roll motion. In compliant mode the roll bar stiffness is applied to this point to simulate the effect of the roll bar stiffness. (Optional). Roll bars can only be added to full axle templates so a template must have this point and points 14 and 32 defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm250.bmp" title="bm250.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Template Settings <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Type 1 General types<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Settings Panel </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Point Types<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><br>
|
||
Point types can be auto filled with a reasonable level of confidence with auto fill set to level 2. The possible nine types are described below to enable direct user editing of this template setting. The equivalent required data values for columns 6 to 11 are also described.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>0 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> To Body/Ground:</font></b></font> No unknowns or equation added to the main solver for this point type. No column 6 to 11 data required. Solver will pre calculate the positions of these points based on either incremental body bump or roll displacement. Example points would be any suspension attachment to body points.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>1 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve Direct (Sphere): </font></b></font>Adds three unknowns to the solver. Uses the spherical distance relationship of this point to any others listed in columns 6 to 11. Examples of this would be the outer ball joint of a conventional wishbone. Columns 6, 7 and 8 refer to other relevant points on part 1, whilst columns 9, 10 and 11 refer to other relevant points on part 2. As an example a lower wishbone outer ball joint would have two spherical equations with its two inboard body attachment points on its first part, and two spherical equations with the upper wishbones outer ball joint and the track rod outer ball joint on its second part.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>2 - Solve Post (Vector Pos):</b> Does not add any unknowns or equations to the main solver for this point type. It is solved after the main solver calculation is complete and uses three other points on the same body to identify its new position. This would normally be used for points such as a springs<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> attachment to a wishbone. The two pivot points and the outer ball joint define its position. Values need to be defined in columns 6, 7,and 8. No values would be expected in columns 9, 10 and 11.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>3 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Define Z-pos (Wheel Centre):</font></b></font> This type is only applicable to the wheel centre point. Solution for the wheel centre is based on a defined z position of the tyre contact point. The two unknowns of x and y are added to the solution. Requires three points to be defined in columns 6, 7 and 8 that identify three other points on part 1, (excluding the stub axle point).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>4 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve Direct (Slider Conn):</font></b></font> Specific point type for strut sliders. Equation based on retaining the relationship between the three strut axis points. Requires the strut top and strut lower point to be defined in columns 6 and 7 for the first part. Requires two points to be defined in columns 9 and 10 for points on part 2.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>5 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve Post (Stub Axle): </font></b></font>Specific point type for stub axle point. Solve method is based on a post main solver calculation that uses three other points on part 1 to define its position. Normally the wheel centre is given as one of the three.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>6 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve direct (Slider Bottom):</font></b></font> Specific type for the strut slider lower axis point. Requires the strut top point to be defined in column 6 for part 1.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>7 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve via Hookes Joint:</font></b></font> Normally only required if a simple spherical solution can<font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">t be used because a force or connection is applied to a simple link element (i.e. two main suspension connections). An example of this is the mounting of a spring or anti-roll bar to a simple tie rod. The two main connection points are required in columns 6 and 7 for part 1.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>8 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Solve Post (Sphere):</font></b></font> A post main solver spherical calculation. Requires three defining points to be given in columns 6, 7 and 8 for part 1. Example is solution of roll bar drop link to roll bar position. Can only be applied to points that have no control over kinematic wheel position.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>9 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Pre-Solve (Kine Fix):</font></b></font> A pre main solver option calculation. Requires no defining points since the point is assumed to be inactive in kinematic mode. It remains fixed to the part it is defined on (normally ground or a ground fixed part). It is used to add additional compliance effects for parts such as rack mounts and sub frames that are assumed to have no kinematic effect but are included in the compliance matrix.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm251.bmp" title="bm251.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Template Settings <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> Selecting Point Type<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Solution Types<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The solution types used by the main solver are based on one of six types. The particular type used for each depends on the point type settings discussed above.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
A brief description of each solution type is given here:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>1 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Sphere Equation:</font></b></font> Spherical distance between point 1 and point 2.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>2 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Distance to Vector: </font></b></font>Perpendicular distance of point 1 from a vector drawn from point 2 to point 3.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>3 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> x-x Based Slope: </font></b></font>The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in x-x, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>4 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> y-y Based Slope: </font></b></font>The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in y-y, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>5 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> z-z Based Slope: </font></b></font>The slope between point 1 and point 2 is constant in z-z, i.e. point 1 and two are on the same vector.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>6 </b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Minimum Z value: </font></b></font>The lowest point of solid disc at point 1 normal to an axis to point 2 has a lowest z value as defined.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Creating a New Template<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
The sequence of data entry for creating a new template should be:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>1)</b> Identify an empty index No.<br>
|
||
<b>2)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Parts</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel enter the template label.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>3)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Parts</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel define the number of parts, (make upright <u>last</u></font></font> part).<br>
|
||
<b>4)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Parts</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel enter the part labels. Ensure the upright is the last part in the list.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>5)</b> Change to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel and define the number of points.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>6)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel define the point labels.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>7)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Points</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel enter the default x, y and z coordinates.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>8)</b> Change to the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel and set the Part 1 and Part 2 properties for each point.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>9)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Settings</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel define the relevant Gen. Type 1and Gen. Type 2 settings.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>10)</b> Set the Auto fit level to 3 and review the filled values.<br>
|
||
<b>11)</b> Check the validity of the auto-filled values using the <i>Data / Run Validation Test&</i> option.<br>
|
||
<b>12)</b> If necessary make modifications to columns 6 to 11 to pass test.<br>
|
||
<b>13)</b> Change to <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Graphics</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel and add define number of graphical elements.<br>
|
||
</font></font><b>14)</b> On the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Graphics</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> panel enter graphical element data.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Introduction<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
This section describes the results variables listed by individual section. For details see sub sections;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>2D Results<br>
|
||
3D Suspension Derivatives File<br>
|
||
3D Points Listing<br>
|
||
3D Compliance Coefficients<br>
|
||
3D Bush Deflections<br>
|
||
3D Joint/Bush Rotations <br>
|
||
3D Bush Forces<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 2D Results<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 2D results are a reduced set of the 3D derivatives list. The 2D results are normally only viewed through the graphs.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The 2D suspension calculated derivatives for bump/rebound articulations are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>1) Camber Angle<br>
|
||
2) Roll Centre Height<br>
|
||
3) Track Change<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Whilst for 2D roll articulation the calculated derivatives are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
1) Camber Angle<br>
|
||
2) Roll Centre Height<br>
|
||
3) Roll Centre Lateral<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm252.bmp" title="bm252.bmp"><br>
|
||
Typical 2D Results plot<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Suspension Derivatives File<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The Suspension Derivatives Files (SDF) contains a complete textual listing of the suspension model hard points, calculated static ride values and suspension derivatives varying with each articulation type.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
For a definition of each suspension derivative see the Theory section.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The SDF file contains:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Listing of input Suspension Hard Points:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>
|
||
Listing depends on suspension type<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Static Values:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Camber angle (deg):</font> Static wheel camber angle<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Toe Angle (SAE) (deg)</font>: Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Toe Angle (Plane of Wheel) (deg):</font> Static toe angle, (+ve toe in)<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Castor Angle (deg):</font> Static Castor angle.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Castor Trail (Hub Trail) (mm):</font> Static Castor trail.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Castor Offset (mm):</font> Static Castor offset<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Kingpin Angle (deg):</font> Static Kingpin angle.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Kingpin Offset (at wheel) (mm):</font> Static Kingpin offset at the wheel centre.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Kingpin Offset (at ground) (mm):</font> Static kingpin offset at the ground plane.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Mechanical Trail (mm):</font> Static Mechanical trail.<br>
|
||
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Roll Centre Height (mm):</font> Static Roll Centre Height<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Derivatives listed for Bump and Rebound Travel:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Camber angle (deg)<br>
|
||
</font>Toe Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Castor Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Kingpin angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Damper Ratio<br>
|
||
Spring Ratio<br>
|
||
Anti Dive (%)<br>
|
||
Anti Squat (%)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Body (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Ground (mm)<br>
|
||
Half Track Change (mm)<br>
|
||
Wheelbase change (mm)<br>
|
||
Damper Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Spring Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Derivatives listed for Roll Articulation:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Camber angle (deg)<br>
|
||
</font>Toe Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Castor Angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Kingpin angle (deg)<br>
|
||
Damper Ratio<br>
|
||
Spring Ratio<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position X (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position Y (mm)<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position Z (mm)<br>
|
||
Half Track Change (mm)<br>
|
||
Wheelbase change (mm)<br>
|
||
Damper Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
Spring Travel (mm)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Derivatives listed for Steer Articulation:<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">Toe Angle (inner) (deg)<br>
|
||
</font>Toe Angle (outer) (deg)<br>
|
||
Camber angle (inner) (deg)<br>
|
||
Camber Angle (outer) (deg)<br>
|
||
Ackermann (%)<br>
|
||
Turning Circle Radius (mm)<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm253.bmp" title="bm253.bmp"><br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<center>Sample Section of the Suspension Derivative File (SDF) listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Points Listing<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The suspension hard points can be listed at any user-defined combination of bump and steering travel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm254.bmp" title="bm254.bmp"><br>
|
||
Setting the Articulation Position for Points Listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The point listing display is different depending whether the solver is currently in kinematic or compliant mode. In kinematic mode the Hard point co-ordinates are listed for each hard point for both left and right hand wheels of each axle. Values listed are the X, Y and Z co-ordinates in the global co-ordinate system.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm255.bmp" title="bm255.bmp"><br>
|
||
Kinematic Point Listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In the compliant mode the Kinematic hard point listing is supplemented at each increment by the inclusion of the compliant hard point positions of each part at the joint. The difference between the kinematic hard point and each compliant parts position at the joint is also listed.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm256.bmp" title="bm256.bmp"><br>
|
||
Compliant Point Listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
All dimensions and deflections are listed in the global Cartesian co-ordinates system, with units of mm.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
In addition to points being listed at a user-defined position two other options are available. These are list the co-ordinates of all the points for a selected corner and current calculation position, or list the co-ordinates of a selected single point for all the current calculation positions.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm257.bmp" title="bm257.bmp"><br>
|
||
Point Listing for Single Point at All Positions - bump travel shown<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Compliance Coefficients<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D compliance coefficients display summarizes the compliant performance of the suspension under a number of defined force sets. Each load case is represented by a series of Vertical bars, each bar being a user selected suspension derivative. The height of the bar is referred to as compliance co-efficient. The displayed co-efficient is the difference between kinematic model and the compliant model, for the selected suspension parameter.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The sign reflects the direction of the change in the suspension parameter, i.e. a co-efficient of </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">0.1 for camber indicates that the camber angle has an increase in negative camber of 0.1 due to the bush compliances under this external load set.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Compliance co-efficients are calculated for the <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">ride</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> condition only, (tip, to view at an alternative position, use the Set Ride Height function).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font></font>{<center><img data="bm258.bmp" title="bm258.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 3D Compliance Coefficients Display<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Bush Deflections<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D bush deflections listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated deflections are listed for each bushed suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush deflections are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Only hard point that are </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">bushed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> will appear in the list. The deflection is the difference between the kinematic position and the compliant position. Note the sign of the deflections is a function of which part is considered to move relative to what. If in doubt check the deformed geometry plot to identify relative sign.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
Points are listed labeled by template point No.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Results Given are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DX Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the global X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DY Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the global Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DZ Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the global Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DX Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the local X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DY Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the local Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DZ Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush deflection component in the local Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm259.bmp" title="bm259.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 3D Bush Deflections Listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Joint/Bush Rotations<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D joint/bush rotations listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated rotations are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush rotations are the kinematic values that are used to determine bush pre-loads when included. The extra rotations due to compliance are not listed.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Points are listed labeled by template point No.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Results Given are;<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DX Global, (N):</font></font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DY Global, (N):</font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DZ Global, (N):</font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the global Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DX Local, (N):</font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DY Local, (N):</font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">DZ Local, (N):</font> Lists the joint/bush rotation component in the local Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm260.bmp" title="bm260.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 3D Joint/Bush Rotations Listing<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> 3D Bush Forces<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The 3D bush forces listing is only available for compliant models. Calculated forces are listed for each suspension hard point at each articulation increment and for each articulation type. The bush forces are listed for the currently displayed external force set and suspension spring setting. Each hard point is listed irrespective of whether set as </font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">rigid</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> or </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">bushed</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Points are listed labeled by template point No.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Results Given are;<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FX Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the global X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FY Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the global Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FZ Global, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the global Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FX Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the local X-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FY Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the local Y-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<font color="#0000ff">FZ Local, (N):</font> Lists the bush force component in the local Z-axis.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm261.bmp" title="bm261.bmp"><br>
|
||
Example 3D Bush Forces Listing<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>+</sup><sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup></center>
|
||
<b><font size="4">Results Description </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> AVI File Writer<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
The graphics display animation sequences can be saved to a file. Currently only AVI format is supported, and without compression. A number of options are presented to make creating AVI files a simple task. Files can be created based on a the current motion sequence, i.e. bump, roll, steering or combined, or via a sequence of user selected images.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
</font>{<center><img data="bm262.bmp" title="bm262.bmp"><br>
|
||
AVI File Writer Dialogue Box<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The top portion of the display identifies whether the AVI file is to be created from the 'Current Motion Sequence' or from a series of 'Stills'. If using the Current motion sequence option, simply select the 'Write File' option to identify the file name/location to save the AVI file too. The AVI file is then generated.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
To create an AVI from a sequence of stills set the option to 'create from stills' then select the 'start' button. This will enable the 'Grab' button and zero the 'frames' counter. You can now set the required graphics view and then 'grab' it. Repeat this process until you have grabbed all required frames and then select 'End' to indicate the end of the grab sequence and enable the 'Save File&' option. Notice that grabbed images can be viewed as an editable list for a limited amount sorting, editing and deletion prior to writing the file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm263.bmp" title="bm263.bmp"><br>
|
||
Editing the 'Grabbed' Stills list<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Within the stills list display users can view individual frames for editing. The application used to do this is identified in the 'BMP use' option at the bottom of the main AVI file writer dialogue.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Both the AVI sequence writer option and the stills grabber option can be either for the complete graphics screen or a selected area. The screen area is defined via clip rectangle the settings for which can either be entered directly or picked via the mouse. A switch is provided to optionally show the clip region on the graphics screen.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm264.bmp" title="bm264.bmp"><br>
|
||
Screen Clip Area Selected<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
By default the AVI file will include a single copy of the sequence. The user can change the number of cycles that are written to the AVI file. In the case of a user picked sequence of stills they would be repeated n cycle times. The replay rate of the AVI file is set by default to replay at a rate of 10 frames/sec. The user can change this setting prior to creating the file.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
A second file write option is provided principally for user grabbed sequences to append the grabbed stills but in reverse order to the AVI file. This then provides a smooth animation sequence from start to end and back to start again when looping through, without having to pick a full sequence.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
The AVI file can be viewed automatically after writing by having the 'Open AVI in viewer after Write/Save' option checked. The AVI will be viewed using the application identified in the Windows registry as being the default AVI file viewer. This can be specified directly by the user through 'AVI Use'; setting.<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><b><font size="4">Theory </font></b><font face="Times New Roman"><b><font face="Arial"> Definition of Suspension Derivatives<br>
|
||
</font></b></font><font size="2"><br>
|
||
</font><b>Introduction <br>
|
||
</b><font face="Times New Roman"><br>
|
||
<font face="Arial">A large number of </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">suspension derivatives</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> are calculated by </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">SHARK</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">, some are given at the static ride height only, whilst the variation with articulation is determined for others. The definition of these derivatives is given in this section and are based upon the SAE standard </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">Vehicle Dynamics Terminology</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> SAE J670e. Where variations from this standard exist or where specific Lotus standards have been applied these will be identified. The units used together with the sign convention are also stated. The calculation formulae are given in terms of both the Shark co-ordinate system and point numbering system.<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Static Values<br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Camber Angle, (deg)</b><br>
|
||
The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm265.bmp" title="bm265.bmp"><br>
|
||
Camber Angle Definition<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is <font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial">toed-in</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial"> if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial">toed-out</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial"> if turned away, (-ve).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)</b><br>
|
||
This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm266.bmp" title="bm266.bmp"><br>
|
||
Toe Angle Definitions<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Castor Angle, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Castor Trail, hub trail, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the wheel centre and negative when it is rearward.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Castor Offset, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm267.bmp" title="bm267.bmp"><br>
|
||
Castor Angle and Offset Definitions<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin Angle, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin offset, at wheel, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Mechanical Trail, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm268.bmp" title="bm268.bmp"><br>
|
||
Kingpin Angle and Offset Definitions<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Roll Centre Height, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. The calculation procedure uses a small bump step to define the tyre contact patch path, and allows a perpendicular plane to be constructed to this path at the current contact point. The intersection of this plane with either the other sides plane, (roll), or the vehicle centre line, (bump) defines the roll centre position.<b><br>
|
||
</b></font></font><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm269.bmp" title="bm269.bmp"><br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height Definition<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><font color="#000000">Incremental Values, (Included in SDF formatted file)<br>
|
||
</font></b><br>
|
||
<b>Camber Angle, (deg)</b><font color="#000000"><br>
|
||
</font>The inclination of the wheel plane to the vertical. It is considered positive when the wheel leans outward at the top and negative when it leans inward.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Toe Angle, SAE, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The static toe angle of a wheel at a specified wheel load or relative position of the wheel centre with respect to the sprung mass, is the angle between a longitudinal axis of the vehicle and the line of intersection of the wheel plane and the road surface. The wheel is <font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial">toed-in</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial"> if the forward portion of the wheel is turned towards a central longitudinal axis of the vehicle (+ve), and </font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial">toed-out</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"> <font face="Arial"> if turned away, (-ve).<br>
|
||
</font></font><br>
|
||
<b>Toe Angle, Plane of Wheel, (deg)</b><br>
|
||
This derivative is a Lotus definition which has the same units and sign convention as the SAE term, but instead of using the intersection of the wheel plane to the ground as the toe line, the angle is measured in the plane of the wheel.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Castor Angle, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The angle in side elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis is inclined rearward (in the upward direction), and negative when the steering axis is inclined forward.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin Angle, (deg)<br>
|
||
</b>The angle in front elevation between the steering axis and the vertical. It is considered positive when the steering axis leans inwards at the top and negative when it leans out.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Damper Ratio<br>
|
||
</b>The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the damper. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the damper. (Lotus definition).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Spring Ratio<br>
|
||
</b>The ratio of change in the vertical height of the tyre contact centre and the change in length of the spring. It has no sign convention and would be greater than one when the change in vertical height of the wheel is more than the change in length of the spring. (Lotus definition).<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Anti Dive, (%)<br>
|
||
</b>The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under breaking that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-dive results in no theoretical body pitching under braking. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using brake split and vehicle c of g height. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. Note that the origin point changes depending whether braking is inboard or outboard.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm270.bmp" title="bm270.bmp"><br>
|
||
% Anti-Dive Derivation<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<b><br>
|
||
Anti Squat, (%)<br>
|
||
</b>The ratio, given as a percentage, of the amount of the weight transfer under acceleration that is reacted by the suspension geometry in resisting the body pitching motion. Thus 100% anti-squat results in no theoretical body pitching under acceleration. The construction technique relies on the suspension side view instantaneous centre being found and then further construction using torque split and vehicle c of g height.. (Lotus Definition). Side view instantaneous centres (I.C.) are determined using small perturbation and projecting a normal to the path of the tyre contact point. The value is only applicable to axles with some portion of the drive load. Note that the origin position changes depending on whether the suspension is independent or not.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm271.bmp" title="bm271.bmp"><br>
|
||
% Anti-Squat Derivation <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial"> 4WD<br>
|
||
</font></font></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm272.bmp" title="bm272.bmp"><br>
|
||
% Anti-Squat Derivation - FWD<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<b><br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
</b></font></font><br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)<br>
|
||
See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Half Track Change, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The change in cross car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase the track and negative for a decrease in track. (Lotus definition).<br>
|
||
<b><br>
|
||
Wheelbase Change, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The change in fore/aft car co-ordinates from the static condition of the tyre contact centre. It is considered positive when the change is an increase in the wheelbase and negative for a decrease in wheelbase. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Damper Travel, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the damper attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Spring Travel, (mm)<br>
|
||
The change in distance from the static condition between the two points defining the spring attachment points. It is considered positive when the change is such as to increase the distance between them and negative when it decreases. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position, X, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental X co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position, Y, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Y co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation, normally given the wheel centre value. (Lotus Definition)<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Roll Centre Position, Z, (mm)<br>
|
||
The incremental Z co-ordinate of the roll centre under roll articulation. (Lotus Definition)<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Ackermann, (%)<br>
|
||
</b>The ratio, given as a percentage, of the actual steer angles compared to those required for zero scrub. (Lotus Definition)<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm273.bmp" title="bm273.bmp"><br>
|
||
% Ackermann Definition<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b><font color="#000000">Additional Incremental Values, (Available on Graphs or SDF splines file)<br>
|
||
</font></b><br>
|
||
<b>Castor Trail, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The horizontal distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the wheel centre. The offset is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the wheel centre and negative when it is rearward.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Castor Offset, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The distance in side elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground, and the centre of tyre contact. The offset is considered positive when the intersection point is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin offset, at wheel centre, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>Kingpin offset at the wheel centre is the horizontal distance in front elevation from the wheel centre to the steering axis. It is considered positive when the wheel centre is outboard of the steering axis, (normal case), and negative if inboard.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<b>Kingpin offset, at ground, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>Kingpin offset at the ground is the horizontal distance in front elevation between the point where the steering axis intersects the ground and the centre of the tyre contact. It is considered positive when the tyre contact is outboard of the steering axis intersection and negative if inboard.<br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<b>Mechanical Trail, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The perpendicular distance in side elevation between the steering axis and the centre of tyre contact. It is considered positive when the steering axis is forward of the tyre contact centre and negative when it is rearward.<br>
|
||
<b><br>
|
||
TCP Position, X, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental X co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
TCP Position, Y, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Y co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
TCP Position, Z, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Z co-ordinate of the tyre contact point.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Hub Position, X, (mm)<br>
|
||
The incremental X co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Hub Position, Y, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Y co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Hub Position, Z, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Z co-ordinate of the wheel centre point.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Tyre Vertical Force, (N)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental value of the vertical force at the tyre contact point. Only given in compliant mode.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Length {Front}, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental length of the front view virtual swing arm.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
Swing Arm Centre Y {Front}, (mm)<br>
|
||
The incremental Y position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Centre Z {Front}, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Z position of the front view virtual swing arm centre.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm274.bmp" title="bm274.bmp"><br>
|
||
Front View Swing Arm Definitions<br>
|
||
</center>
|
||
<b><br>
|
||
Swing Arm Length {Side}, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental length of the side view virtual swing arm.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Centre X {Side}, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental X position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Swing Arm Centre Z {Side}, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental Z position of the side view virtual swing arm centre.<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Body, (mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The point in the transverse vertical plane through any pair of wheel centres at which lateral forces may be applied to the sprung mass without producing suspension roll. The preceding is the SAE definition, and is more normally stated as <font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">the instantaneous centre of rotation of the body</font></font><font face="Times New Roman"><font face="Arial">. At static for a symmetrical suspension this point lies on the vehicle centreline and thus only the roll centre height is quoted at static. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the body origin. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
</b></font></font><br>
|
||
Roll Centre Height to Ground, (mm)<br>
|
||
See full description above. This is the variation of the roll centre height with wheel bump/rebound articulation, relative to the ground origin. (Lotus definition).<b><br>
|
||
<br>
|
||
TCP dx/dz Gradient, (mm/mm)<br>
|
||
</b>The incremental value for the gradient of the Tyre contact point when viewed from the side.<b><br>
|
||
</b><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<sup>$</sup><sup>#</sup><sup>></sup><sup>K</sup><sup>K</sup><b><font size="4">LOTUS ENGINEERING</font></b><br>
|
||
<b><font size="2"><br>
|
||
{<center><img data="bm275.bmp" title="bm275.bmp"><br>
|
||
<img data="bm276.bmp" title="bm276.bmp"><br>
|
||
<img data="bm277.bmp" title="bm277.bmp"><br>
|
||
</font></b></center>
|
||
<br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
<font size="4"><br>
|
||
<p><hr><p>
|
||
</font></div></body>
|
||
</html>
|
||
|
||
<style>#divhlpmain img{max-width:1000px}#divhlpmain canvas{max-width:400px}</style>
|
||
<script>
|
||
var g_wmf_injected=false; var g_wmf_list=[];
|
||
function init_index(){
|
||
function getWindowHeight(){
|
||
var windowHeight = 0;
|
||
if (typeof(window.innerHeight) == 'number'){
|
||
windowHeight = window.innerHeight;
|
||
}else{
|
||
var ieStrict = document.documentElement.clientHeight;
|
||
var ieQuirks = document.body.clientHeight;
|
||
windowHeight = (ieStrict > 0) ? ieStrict : ieQuirks;
|
||
}
|
||
if(!windowHeight) windowHeight=0;
|
||
return windowHeight;
|
||
}
|
||
function getScrollTop(){
|
||
var scrollTop;
|
||
if(document.body && document.body.scrollTop){
|
||
scrollTop = document.body.scrollTop;
|
||
}else if(document.documentElement && document.documentElement.scrollTop){
|
||
scrollTop = document.documentElement.scrollTop;
|
||
}
|
||
if(!scrollTop) scrollTop=0;
|
||
return scrollTop;
|
||
}
|
||
function getOffset(b){
|
||
var a = 0;
|
||
var c = 0;
|
||
while (b && !isNaN(b.offsetLeft) && !isNaN(b.offsetTop)) {
|
||
a += b.offsetLeft;
|
||
c += b.offsetTop;
|
||
b = b.offsetParent;
|
||
}
|
||
return {
|
||
left: a,
|
||
top: c
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
function getfileext(s){
|
||
if(!s) s='';
|
||
var arr=s.split('.');
|
||
if(arr.length>1){
|
||
return arr[arr.length-1].toLowerCase();
|
||
}
|
||
return '';
|
||
}
|
||
function inject(s){
|
||
var o = document.createElement('scri' + 'pt');
|
||
o.setAttribute('src', s);
|
||
o.setAttribute('type', 'text/javascript');
|
||
document.body.appendChild(o);
|
||
}
|
||
var gwaok=false;
|
||
if(window.WebAssembly) gwaok=true;
|
||
function proc_loadimg(){
|
||
var wh=getWindowHeight();
|
||
var st=getScrollTop();
|
||
var dt=st-(wh*2);
|
||
var db=st+wh+(wh*2);
|
||
var dy,data,c,ext;
|
||
var a=document.getElementsByTagName('IMG');
|
||
for(var i = 0; i < a.length; i++){
|
||
if(a[i].src)continue;
|
||
data=a[i].getAttribute('data');
|
||
if(!data)continue;
|
||
c=getOffset(a[i]);
|
||
if (c.top>=dt && c.top<=db){
|
||
a[i].src=data;
|
||
ext=getfileext(data);
|
||
if(ext=='wmf' || (gwaok && (ext=='shg'|| ext=='dib' || ext=='emf' || ext=='mrb'))){
|
||
g_wmf_list.push(a[i]);
|
||
if(!g_wmf_injected){
|
||
g_wmf_injected=true;
|
||
if(gwaok){
|
||
inject('/chmviewer/js/all_wmf_wasm.js?t=1');
|
||
}else{
|
||
inject('/chmviewer/js/all_wmf.js');
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
function proc_fix1(){
|
||
var a=document.getElementsByTagName('SPAN');
|
||
for(var i = 0; i < a.length; i++){
|
||
if(a[i].style.backgroundColor=='rgb(0, 0, 0)'){
|
||
if(a[i].parentNode.tagName=='FONT'){
|
||
if(a[i].parentNode.color=='#000000'){
|
||
a[i].style.backgroundColor='#FFFFFF';
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
var a=document.getElementsByTagName('FONT');
|
||
for(var i = 0; i < a.length; i++){
|
||
if(a[i].color=='#000000'){
|
||
if(a[i].parentNode.tagName=='SPAN'){
|
||
if(a[i].parentNode.style.backgroundColor=='rgb(0, 0, 0)'){
|
||
a[i].parentNode.style.backgroundColor='#FFFFFF';
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
}
|
||
var timer1;
|
||
window.onscroll=function(){
|
||
clearTimeout(timer1);
|
||
timer1=setTimeout(function(){
|
||
proc_loadimg();
|
||
},50);
|
||
}
|
||
proc_loadimg();
|
||
proc_fix1();
|
||
}
|
||
init_index();
|
||
</script> |